WebSuite User Guide Web Suite

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 300

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

www.wallstreetsystems.com

Wall Street Systems – Empowering Treasury Trade and Settlement

Wallstreet Suite
WebSuite
User Guide
Version 7.4.6

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part
of Wall Street Systems. The software and documentation, which includes information contained in any databases,
described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement and may only be
used or copied in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software or
documentation except as specially allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Wall Street Systems.
Although Wall Street Systems has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, Wall Street Systems
makes herein no warranty or representation, either expressed or implied, with respect to software or
documentation, its quality, performance, marketability, or fitness for a particular purpose. As a result, this
software is provided "as is", and in no event will Wall Street Systems be liable for direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages from any defect in the software or by virtue of providing this
documentation, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. The documentation may contain technical
inaccuracies and omissions.
The mention of an activity or instrument in this publication does not imply that all matters relating to that activity or
instrument are supported by Wallstreet Suite, nor does it imply that processing of or by that activity or instrument is
carried out in any particular way, even if such processing is customary in some or all parts of the industry.
The windows and screen images shown herein were obtained from prototypes during software development. The
actual windows and screen images in the software may differ.
© Copyright 2011 Wall Street Systems IPH AB. All rights reserved.
Second Edition (July 2011)
This edition applies to Wallstreet Suite version 7.4.6 and to all later releases and versions until indicated in new
editions or Wall Street Systems communications. Make sure you are using the latest edition for the release level of
the Wall Street Systems product.

Wall Street Systems, WSS, WALLSTREET, WALLSTREET SUITE and the Wall Street Systems logos are
trademarks of Wall Street Systems Delaware, Inc.
Finance KIT, Trema and Trema logo are trademarks of Wall Street Systems Sweden AB.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other products mentioned in this book may be trademarks or service marks of their respective companies or
organizations.
Company names, people names, and data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise noted.

Contents

Preface ...........................................................................................................................17
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 17
How to use this book ................................................................................................................... 17
Assumptions .............................................................................................................................. 17
Associated documents ................................................................................................................ 17

1 Overview ....................................................................................................................19
1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 19
1.1.1 Dashboard ...................................................................................................................... 19
1.2 Cash management (CMM) .................................................................................................... 19
1.2.1 CMM components .......................................................................................................... 20
1.2.2 Using CMM ..................................................................................................................... 20
1.3 Treasury management (TRMWeb) ....................................................................................... 21

2 Getting started ...........................................................................................................23
2.1 Navigating WebSuite ............................................................................................................ 23
2.1.1 Logging in and out .......................................................................................................... 23
2.1.1.1 Logging in ............................................................................................................. 23
2.1.1.2 Logging out ........................................................................................................... 24
2.1.2 Navigating the menu ....................................................................................................... 24
2.1.2.1 Defining components of the menu ........................................................................ 25
2.1.2.2 Opening functions ................................................................................................. 25
2.1.3 Searching for functions and managing favorites ............................................................. 27
2.1.3.1 Searching for functions ......................................................................................... 27
2.1.3.2 Managing favorites ............................................................................................... 28
2.1.4 Accessing secured functionality and data ....................................................................... 28
2.1.4.1 Accessing secured functionality and data ............................................................ 28
2.1.4.2 Reauthenticating your identity .............................................................................. 28
2.1.5 Selecting a startup page ................................................................................................. 29
2.1.5.1 Selecting a startup page ....................................................................................... 29
2.1.5.2 Opening the startup page ..................................................................................... 29
2.1.5.3 Clearing the startup page selection ...................................................................... 29
2.1.6 Using HTTPS in Internet Explorer ................................................................................... 29
2.1.6.1 Adding WebSuite to your local intranet ................................................................ 29
2.1.6.2 Changing your security settings for WebSuite ...................................................... 30
2.2 Working with data ................................................................................................................. 30
2.2.1 Searching for data ........................................................................................................... 30
WebSuite User Guide

2.2.1.1 Understanding key features of search .................................................................. 31
2.2.1.2 Searching for data ................................................................................................ 32
2.2.2 Viewing data using tables and drilldowns ....................................................................... 32
2.2.2.1 Navigating tables across multiple pages .............................................................. 33
2.2.2.2 Sorting tables ........................................................................................................ 33
2.2.2.3 Drilling down ......................................................................................................... 33
2.2.3 Entering data ................................................................................................................... 33
2.2.3.1 Using text fields .................................................................................................... 34
2.2.3.2 Using number fields .............................................................................................. 34
2.2.3.3 Using date fields ................................................................................................... 35
2.2.3.4 Using lists ............................................................................................................. 38
2.2.3.5 Using multiple selection lists ................................................................................. 39
2.2.3.6 Using checkboxes ................................................................................................ 40
2.2.3.7 Using option buttons ............................................................................................. 40
2.3 Running reports and worksheets ........................................................................................ 40
2.3.1 Running CMM reports and worksheets ........................................................................... 40
2.3.1.1 Running reports and worksheets .......................................................................... 41
2.3.1.2 Selecting favorite report templates ....................................................................... 41
2.3.1.3 Hiding report templates ........................................................................................ 41
2.3.2 Running CMM Cash Monitor and Cash Position reports ................................................ 42
2.3.2.1 Running reports .................................................................................................... 42
2.3.2.2 Selecting favorite report templates ....................................................................... 42
2.3.2.3 Hiding report templates ........................................................................................ 43
2.4 Using information features .................................................................................................. 44
2.4.1 Working with confirmation and error messages .............................................................. 44
2.4.1.1 Working with confirmation messages ................................................................... 44
2.4.1.2 Working with error messages ............................................................................... 44
2.4.2 Working with daily bulletins ............................................................................................. 45
2.4.2.1 Creating daily bulletins ......................................................................................... 45
2.4.2.2 Deleting daily bulletins .......................................................................................... 45
2.4.2.3 Reviewing daily bulletins ...................................................................................... 45
2.4.3 Viewing CMM environment information .......................................................................... 46
2.5 Using help .............................................................................................................................. 46
2.5.1 Opening help ................................................................................................................... 46
2.5.2 Navigating help ............................................................................................................... 47
2.5.3 Searching help ................................................................................................................ 48
2.5.4 Marking and viewing favorites ......................................................................................... 49
2.5.5 Using other help features ................................................................................................ 49
2.6 Setting your user options ..................................................................................................... 51
2.6.1 Setting your defaults ....................................................................................................... 51
2.6.2 Setting your bank account label format ........................................................................... 51
2.6.3 Setting your currency label format .................................................................................. 51

3 Managing market data ..............................................................................................53
3.1 Understanding market data .................................................................................................. 53
3.2 Managing interest rates (and related data) ......................................................................... 53
4

3.2.1 Managing interest rate categories ................................................................................... 53
3.2.1.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 54
3.2.1.2 Managing interest rate categories in TRM ............................................................ 54
3.2.1.3 Creating interest rate categories in CMM ............................................................. 54
3.2.1.4 Editing interest rate categories in CMM ................................................................ 54
3.2.1.5 Deleting interest rate categories in CMM ............................................................. 55
3.2.2 Managing interest rate types ........................................................................................... 55
3.2.2.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 55
3.2.2.2 Managing interest rate types in TRM .................................................................... 56
3.2.2.3 Creating interest rate types in CMM ..................................................................... 56
3.2.2.4 Editing interest rate types in CMM ........................................................................ 56
3.2.2.5 Deleting interest rate types in CMM ..................................................................... 56
3.2.3 Capturing and maintaining interest rates ........................................................................ 57
3.2.3.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 57
3.2.3.2 Capturing and maintaining interest rates in TRM ................................................. 57
3.2.3.3 Importing interest rate files in CMM ...................................................................... 58
3.2.4 Capturing and maintaining tiered interest rates .............................................................. 58
3.2.4.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 59
3.2.4.2 Capturing and maintaining tiered interest rates .................................................... 60
3.3 Managing foreign exchange rates (and related data) ........................................................ 60
3.3.1 Reviewing foreign exchange rate sources ...................................................................... 60
3.3.1.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 64
3.3.1.2 Mapping foreign exchange rate scenarios to processes ...................................... 64
3.3.2 Reviewing market data ................................................................................................... 64
3.3.3 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 64
3.3.4 Reviewing interest rates .................................................................................................. 65
3.3.5 Reviewing foreign exchange rates .................................................................................. 65

4 Managing forecasted activity ...................................................................................67
4.1 Capturing forecasts .............................................................................................................. 67
4.1.1 Importing forecast files .................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1.1 Importing forecast files using the standard method .............................................. 68
4.1.1.2 Importing forecast files using the quick method ................................................... 69
4.1.2 Entering forecasts ........................................................................................................... 75
4.1.2.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 75
4.1.2.2 Entering short-term forecasts ............................................................................... 76
4.1.2.3 Entering medium- and long-term forecasts .......................................................... 77
4.1.2.4 Entering recurring forecasts ................................................................................. 77
4.1.2.5 Allocating medium- and long-term forecasts to short-term forecasts ................... 79
4.1.3 Entering forecasts in TRM .............................................................................................. 79
4.1.4 Canceling forecasts ........................................................................................................ 79
4.1.4.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 79
4.1.4.2 Canceling forecasts .............................................................................................. 80
4.2 Approving forecasts ............................................................................................................. 80
4.2.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 81
4.2.2 Approving short-term forecasts ....................................................................................... 81
4.2.3 Approving medium- and long-term forecasts .................................................................. 82
WebSuite User Guide

4.2.4 Completing the second approval of forecasts ................................................................. 82
4.3 Releasing forecasts .............................................................................................................. 83
4.3.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 83
4.3.2 Releasing short-term forecasts ....................................................................................... 83
4.3.3 Releasing medium- and long-term forecasts .................................................................. 84
4.4 Analyzing forecasts .............................................................................................................. 84
4.4.1 Running the Forecast report ........................................................................................... 84
4.4.1.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 85
4.4.1.2 Running the Forecast report ................................................................................. 85

5 Managing expected and instructed activity ............................................................87
5.1 Capturing transactions ......................................................................................................... 87
5.1.1 Importing accounts payable and direct debit files ........................................................... 87
5.1.1.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 87
5.1.1.2 Importing accounts payable and direct debit files ................................................. 88
5.1.1.3 Undoing accounts payable and direct debit file imports ....................................... 90
5.1.1.4 Undoing individual transactions in imports ........................................................... 90
5.1.2 Entering transactions ...................................................................................................... 91
5.1.2.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 91
5.1.2.2 Entering basic single transactions ........................................................................ 91
5.1.2.3 Entering one-off single transactions ..................................................................... 93
5.1.2.4 Entering template-based single transactions ........................................................ 96
5.1.2.5 Entering repetitive transactions ............................................................................ 98
5.1.2.6 Using other functions ............................................................................................ 98
5.1.3 Entering transactions in TRM .......................................................................................... 98
5.2 Editing and deleting transactions ....................................................................................... 98
5.2.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 99
5.2.2 Editing transactions ....................................................................................................... 100
5.2.3 Deleting transactions .................................................................................................... 100
5.3 Authorizing transactions .................................................................................................... 101
5.3.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 101
5.3.2 Reviewing payments before authorization .................................................................... 101
5.3.3 Authorizing transactions ................................................................................................ 102
5.3.4 Undoing transaction authorizations ............................................................................... 102
5.4 Releasing transactions ....................................................................................................... 102
5.4.1 Aggregating payments at release ................................................................................. 103
5.4.2 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 105
5.4.3 Reviewing payments before release ............................................................................. 106
5.4.4 Releasing payments ..................................................................................................... 106
5.4.5 Releasing receipts ........................................................................................................ 107
5.4.6 Undoing transaction releases ....................................................................................... 107
5.4.7 Undoing individual transactions in releases .................................................................. 107
5.4.8 Changing transactions from Releasing status to Released status ................................ 108
5.5 Managing bank messages .................................................................................................. 108
5.5.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 108
5.5.2 Importing bank messages ............................................................................................. 109
6

5.6 Managing free format messages ....................................................................................... 109
5.6.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 110
5.6.2 Importing free format messages ................................................................................... 110
5.6.2.1 Entering free format messages .......................................................................... 110
5.6.2.2 Editing free format messages ............................................................................. 111
5.6.2.3 Deleting free format messages ........................................................................... 111
5.6.2.4 Sending and removing free format messages .................................................... 111
5.7 Rejecting transactions ........................................................................................................ 111
5.7.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 112
5.7.2 Rejecting transactions ................................................................................................... 112
5.7.3 Undoing transaction rejections ...................................................................................... 113
5.8 Analyzing transactions ....................................................................................................... 113
5.8.1 Running the Cash Transaction report ........................................................................... 113
5.8.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 113
5.8.1.2 Running the Cash Transaction report ................................................................. 114
5.8.2 Running the Remittance Details report ......................................................................... 114
5.8.2.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 114
5.8.2.2 Running the Remittance Details report ............................................................... 114

6 Managing bank-reported activity ...........................................................................115
6.1 Capturing bank statements, transactions, and balances ................................................ 115
6.1.1 Importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files ............................................. 115
6.1.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 115
6.1.1.2 Importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files .................................. 116
6.1.1.3 Undoing bank statement, transaction, and balance file imports ......................... 118
6.1.2 Entering bank statements, transactions, and balances ................................................ 118
6.1.2.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 119
6.1.2.2 Entering bank statements, transactions, and balances ...................................... 120
6.1.2.3 Entering bank transactions (and adjustment cash records) ................................ 120
6.2 Editing bank statements ..................................................................................................... 120
6.2.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 121
6.2.2 Editing bank statements ................................................................................................ 121
6.3 Closing and exporting bank statements ........................................................................... 121
6.3.1 Exporting empty close-ended bank statements ............................................................ 122
6.3.2 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 122
6.3.3 Closing and exporting bank statements ........................................................................ 122
6.3.4 Include parameter and export through multiple interchange ......................................... 123
6.4 Updating and recalculating bank balances ...................................................................... 124
6.4.1 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances ............................................. 124
6.4.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 124
6.4.1.2 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for internal and external
bank accounts .................................................................................................................. 125
6.4.1.3 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for internal bank accounts
125
6.4.1.4 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for external bank accounts
125
WebSuite User Guide

6.4.2 Manually updating and recalculating bank balances .................................................... 126
6.4.2.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 126
6.4.2.2 Manually updating and recalculating bank balances .......................................... 127
6.4.2.3 Manually recalculating value date bank balances .............................................. 127
6.5 Exporting bank balances .................................................................................................... 129
6.5.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 129
6.5.2 Exporting bank balances ............................................................................................... 129
6.6 Analyzing bank statements, transactions, and balances ................................................ 130
6.6.1 Running the Bank Statement report .............................................................................. 130
6.6.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 130
6.6.1.2 Running the Bank Statement report ................................................................... 131
6.6.2 Running the Bank Transaction report ........................................................................... 131
6.6.2.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 131
6.6.2.2 Running the Bank Transaction report ................................................................. 131
6.6.3 Running the Bank Balance Analysis report ................................................................... 132
6.6.3.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 132
6.6.3.2 Running the Bank Balance Analysis report ........................................................ 132
6.6.4 Running the International Bank Balances report .......................................................... 133
6.6.4.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 133
6.6.4.2 Running the International Bank Balances report ................................................ 133
6.6.5 Running the Returned Checks report ........................................................................... 133
6.6.5.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 134
6.6.5.2 Running the Returned Checks report ................................................................. 134

7 Reconciling activity ................................................................................................135
7.1 Reconciling activity at the cash level ................................................................................ 135
7.1.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 136
7.1.2 Reconciling activity at the cash level ............................................................................ 136
7.1.3 Undoing reconciliation ................................................................................................... 136
7.1.4 Entering adjustment forecasts ...................................................................................... 137
7.1.5 Showing deviation between selected activities ............................................................. 138
7.2 Reconciling activity at the accounting level ..................................................................... 138
7.2.1 Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically ....................................... 139
7.2.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 139
7.2.1.2 Scheduling automatic reconciliation ................................................................... 140
7.2.1.3 Manually invoking automatic reconciliation ........................................................ 140
7.2.2 Reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually ............................................. 140
7.2.2.1 "4-eyes" security ................................................................................................. 141
7.2.2.2 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 141
7.2.2.3 Reconciling many bank transactions to many cash records ............................... 142
7.2.2.4 Reconciling one bank transaction to many cash records ................................... 143
7.2.3 Reconciling bank transactions without corresponding cash records ............................ 144
7.2.3.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 144
7.2.3.2 Reconciling bank transactions without corresponding cash records .................. 144
7.2.4 Reconciling internal cash records without corresponding bank transactions ................ 144
7.2.4.1 Generated interbank transactions and internal financial transactions ................ 145
7.2.4.2 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 145
8

7.2.4.3 Generating internal bank transactions ................................................................ 145
7.2.4.4 Closing internal bank transactions ...................................................................... 146
7.2.5 Undoing reconciliation ................................................................................................... 146
7.2.5.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 146
7.2.5.2 Undoing reconciliation in the Manual Reconciliation function ............................. 147
7.2.5.3 Undoing reconciliation in the Bank Reconciliation function ................................ 148
7.2.6 Finalizing bank balances ............................................................................................... 148
7.2.6.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 149
7.2.6.2 Finalizing bank balances .................................................................................... 149
7.2.7 Entering cash allocations .............................................................................................. 149
7.2.7.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 150
7.2.7.2 Entering cash allocations .................................................................................... 150
7.3 Analyzing reconciliation ..................................................................................................... 150
7.3.1 Running the Daily Reconciliation report ........................................................................ 151
7.3.1.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 151
7.3.1.2 Running the Daily Reconciliation report ............................................................. 151
7.3.1.3 Classification in the Daily Reconciliation report .................................................. 151
7.3.2 Running the Suspense Reconciliation report ................................................................ 151
7.3.2.1 Prerequisites ....................................................................................................... 152
7.3.2.2 Running the Suspense Reconciliation report ..................................................... 152
7.3.3 Getting reconciliation data from the Bank Transaction report ....................................... 152
7.3.4 Getting reconciliation data from the Cash Transaction report ....................................... 152

8 Monitoring cash position .......................................................................................153
8.1 Running the Cash Monitor report ...................................................................................... 153
8.1.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 153
8.1.2 Running the Cash Monitor report .................................................................................. 154
8.2 Running the Cash Position report ..................................................................................... 154
8.2.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 154
8.2.2 Running the Cash Position report ................................................................................. 154

9 Calculating cash balances .....................................................................................155
9.1 Definition and usage ........................................................................................................... 155
9.2 Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 155
9.2.1 Cash balance manual entry .......................................................................................... 156
9.2.2 Modifying the initialization amount ................................................................................ 156
9.2.3 Modifying the initialization date and/or amount ............................................................. 156
9.3 Calculation ........................................................................................................................... 157
9.3.1 Calculation using Task Scheduler ................................................................................. 157
9.3.2 Manual calculation ........................................................................................................ 157
9.4 How calculation works ....................................................................................................... 158
9.4.1 Cash balance calculation flow ....................................................................................... 159
9.5 Cash balances in reports ................................................................................................... 159
9.5.1 Example of a "list" report: .............................................................................................. 161

WebSuite User Guide

10 Managing static data .............................................................................................165
10.1 Understanding static data ................................................................................................ 165
10.2 Managing basic static data .............................................................................................. 166
10.2.1 Managing currencies ................................................................................................... 166
10.2.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 166
10.2.1.2 Managing currencies in TRM ............................................................................ 167
10.2.1.3 Creating currencies in CMM ............................................................................. 167
10.2.1.4 Editing currencies in CMM ................................................................................ 167
10.2.1.5 Deleting currencies in CMM ............................................................................. 167
10.2.2 Managing countries ..................................................................................................... 167
10.2.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 168
10.2.2.2 Managing countries in TRM .............................................................................. 168
10.2.2.3 Creating countries in CMM ............................................................................... 168
10.2.2.4 Editing countries in CMM .................................................................................. 168
10.2.2.5 Deleting countries in CMM ............................................................................... 168
10.2.3 Managing states .......................................................................................................... 169
10.2.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 169
10.2.3.2 Creating states ................................................................................................. 169
10.2.3.3 Editing states .................................................................................................... 169
10.2.3.4 Deleting states .................................................................................................. 169
10.2.4 Managing regions ....................................................................................................... 169
10.2.4.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 170
10.2.4.2 Managing regions in TRM ................................................................................ 170
10.2.4.3 Creating regions in CMM .................................................................................. 170
10.2.4.4 Editing regions in CMM .................................................................................... 170
10.2.4.5 Deleting regions in CMM .................................................................................. 170
10.2.5 Managing industries .................................................................................................... 171
10.2.5.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 171
10.2.5.2 Managing industries in TRM ............................................................................. 171
10.2.5.3 Creating industries in CMM .............................................................................. 171
10.2.5.4 Editing industries in CMM ................................................................................. 171
10.2.5.5 Deleting industries in CMM ............................................................................... 172
10.2.6 Managing payment methods ....................................................................................... 172
10.2.6.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 172
10.2.6.2 Creating, editing, and deleting payment methods ............................................ 172
10.2.6.3 Mapping payment methods to processes ......................................................... 172
10.2.7 Managing non-business days ..................................................................................... 172
10.2.7.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 173
10.2.7.2 Creating CMM holidays .................................................................................... 173
10.2.7.3 Editing CMM holidays ....................................................................................... 173
10.2.7.4 Deleting CMM holidays ..................................................................................... 174
10.2.7.5 Managing TRM calendars and calendar groups ............................................... 174
10.2.8 Managing employee roles ........................................................................................... 174
10.2.8.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 174
10.2.8.2 Creating employee roles ................................................................................... 174
10.2.8.3 Editing employee roles ..................................................................................... 175
10.2.8.4 Deleting employee roles ................................................................................... 175

10.2.9 Managing custom parameters .................................................................................... 175
10.2.9.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 175
10.2.9.2 Defining forecast custom parameters ............................................................... 176
10.2.9.3 Defining bank transaction custom parameters ................................................. 176
10.2.9.4 Changing the order of custom parameters ....................................................... 176
10.3 Managing parties ............................................................................................................... 176
10.3.1 Managing entities (and related data) .......................................................................... 177
10.3.1.1 Managing entities ............................................................................................. 178
10.3.1.2 Managing entities in TRM ................................................................................. 178
10.3.1.3 Managing in-house banks ................................................................................ 179
10.3.1.4 Managing in-house banks in TRM .................................................................... 180
10.3.1.5 Managing business segments .......................................................................... 181
10.3.1.6 Managing accounts payable and receivable mappings .................................... 182
10.3.2 Managing counterparties (and related data) ............................................................... 183
10.3.2.1 Managing counterparty types ........................................................................... 183
10.3.2.2 Managing counterparties .................................................................................. 184
10.3.2.3 Managing counterparties in TRM ..................................................................... 185
10.3.2.4 Managing counterparty contacts ...................................................................... 186
10.3.2.5 Managing counterparty contacts in TRM .......................................................... 186
10.3.3 Managing party roles .................................................................................................. 187
10.3.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 188
10.3.3.2 Creating party roles .......................................................................................... 188
10.3.3.3 Editing party roles ............................................................................................. 188
10.3.3.4 Deleting party roles ........................................................................................... 188
10.3.3.5 Adding parties to party roles ............................................................................. 189
10.3.3.6 Removing parties from party roles .................................................................... 189
10.3.3.7 Adding party roles to a party ............................................................................. 189
10.3.3.8 Removing party roles from parties .................................................................... 190
10.3.4 Managing party relationships ...................................................................................... 190
10.3.4.1 Managing entity relationships ........................................................................... 190
10.3.4.2 Managing counterparty relationships ................................................................ 192
10.3.4.3 Managing bank relationships ............................................................................ 193
10.3.4.4 Managing regulatory authority relationships ..................................................... 193
10.4 Managing bank accounts ................................................................................................. 194
10.4.1 Managing bank account types .................................................................................... 195
10.4.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 195
10.4.1.2 Creating bank account types ............................................................................ 196
10.4.1.3 Editing bank account types ............................................................................... 196
10.4.1.4 Deleting bank account types ............................................................................ 196
10.4.2 Managing entity bank accounts .................................................................................. 196
10.4.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 196
10.4.2.2 Managing entity bank accounts in TRM ........................................................... 197
10.4.2.3 Creating entity bank accounts in CMM ............................................................. 198
10.4.2.4 Editing entity bank accounts in CMM ............................................................... 199
10.4.2.5 Deleting entity bank accounts in CMM ............................................................. 201
10.4.3 Managing counterparty bank accounts ....................................................................... 201
10.4.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 201
10.4.3.2 Managing counterparty bank accounts in TRM ................................................ 202
WebSuite User Guide

10.4.3.3 Creating counterparty bank accounts in CMM ................................................. 202
10.4.3.4 Editing counterparty bank accounts in CMM .................................................... 203
10.4.3.5 Deleting counterparty bank accounts in CMM .................................................. 203
10.4.4 Managing bank account relationships ......................................................................... 204
10.4.4.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 204
10.4.4.2 Managing bank account relationships and relationship types in TRM .............. 204
10.4.4.3 Creating relationship types in CMM .................................................................. 204
10.4.4.4 Editing relationship types in CMM .................................................................... 205
10.4.4.5 Deleting relationship types in CMM .................................................................. 205
10.4.4.6 Managing bank account relationships in CMM ................................................. 205
10.4.4.7 Bank Account Relationship usage in report criteria .......................................... 205
10.4.5 Managing bank account groups .................................................................................. 206
10.4.5.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 206
10.4.5.2 Managing bank account groups in TRM ........................................................... 207
10.4.5.3 Creating bank account groups in CMM ............................................................ 207
10.4.5.4 Editing bank account groups in CMM ............................................................... 207
10.4.5.5 Deleting bank account groups in CMM ............................................................. 207
10.4.5.6 Adding bank accounts to groups in CMM ......................................................... 207
10.4.5.7 Removing bank accounts from a group in CMM ............................................... 208
10.4.6 Managing settlement groups ....................................................................................... 208
10.4.6.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 208
10.4.6.2 Creating settlement groups .............................................................................. 208
10.4.6.3 Editing settlement groups ................................................................................. 209
10.4.6.4 Deleting settlement groups ............................................................................... 209
10.4.7 Managing signatories (and related data) .................................................................... 209
10.4.7.1 Managing people and signatories ..................................................................... 209
10.4.7.2 Managing people in TRM ................................................................................. 210
10.4.7.3 Managing signatory groups .............................................................................. 211
10.4.7.4 Managing signatory rules ................................................................................. 212
10.5 Managing instruments ...................................................................................................... 214
10.5.1 Managing CMM instrument categories ....................................................................... 215
10.5.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 215
10.5.1.2 Managing instrument categories in TRM .......................................................... 215
10.5.1.3 Creating instrument categories in CMM ........................................................... 215
10.5.1.4 Editing instrument categories in CMM .............................................................. 216
10.5.1.5 Deleting instrument categories in CMM ............................................................ 216
10.5.2 Managing CMM instrument types ............................................................................... 216
10.5.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 216
10.5.2.2 Managing instrument types in TRM .................................................................. 216
10.5.2.3 Creating instrument types in CMM ................................................................... 217
10.5.2.4 Editing instrument types in CMM ...................................................................... 217
10.5.2.5 Deleting instrument types in CMM .................................................................... 217
10.5.2.6 Managing SWIFT MT940 mappings ................................................................. 217
10.5.3 Managing CMM instrument group relationships ......................................................... 217
10.5.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 217
10.5.3.2 Creating instrument relationships ..................................................................... 218
10.5.3.3 Editing instrument relationships ........................................................................ 218
10.5.3.4 Deleting instrument relationships ..................................................................... 218
12

10.5.3.5 Creating instrument groups .............................................................................. 218
10.5.3.6 Editing instrument groups ................................................................................. 219
10.5.3.7 Deleting instrument groups ............................................................................... 219
10.5.3.8 Creating instrument group relationships ........................................................... 219
10.5.3.9 Editing instrument group relationships ............................................................. 219
10.5.4 Managing TRM instruments ........................................................................................ 219
10.6 Reviewing static data through CMM functionality ......................................................... 220
10.6.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 220
10.6.2 Reviewing entities ....................................................................................................... 220
10.6.3 Reviewing counterparties ............................................................................................ 220
10.6.4 Reviewing entity bank accounts .................................................................................. 221

11 Netting ....................................................................................................................223
11.1 Managing intercompany payments ................................................................................. 223
11.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 223
11.1.2 Entering intercompany payments ............................................................................... 224
11.1.3 Editing intercompany payments .................................................................................. 224
11.1.4 Deleting intercompany payments ................................................................................ 224
11.1.5 Approving intercompany payments ............................................................................. 225
11.2 Managing foreign exchange offers/asks ......................................................................... 225
11.2.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 225
11.2.2 Entering foreign exchange offers/asks ........................................................................ 226
11.2.3 Editing foreign exchange offers/asks .......................................................................... 226
11.2.4 Deleting foreign exchange offers/asks ........................................................................ 226
11.2.5 Approving foreign exchange offers/asks ..................................................................... 226
11.3 Analyzing netting .............................................................................................................. 227
11.3.1 Running the Net Position by Entity report ................................................................... 227
11.3.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 227
11.3.1.2 Running the Net Position by Entity report ......................................................... 227
11.3.2 Running the Net Position by Currency report ............................................................. 228
11.3.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 228
11.3.2.2 Running the Net Position by Currency report ................................................... 228
11.3.3 Running the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report ..................................................... 228
11.3.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 228
11.3.3.2 Running the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report ........................................... 229
11.4 Netting and settlement ..................................................................................................... 229

12 Concentrating cash ...............................................................................................233
12.1 Target balancing bank accounts ..................................................................................... 233
12.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 233
12.1.2 Running all sweeps in a report .................................................................................... 234
12.1.3 Running select sweeps in a report .............................................................................. 234
12.2 Settling bank accounts ..................................................................................................... 234
12.2.1 Locking and unlocking bank accounts ........................................................................ 235
12.2.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 236

WebSuite User Guide

12.2.1.2 Locking bank accounts ..................................................................................... 236
12.2.1.3 Unlocking bank accounts .................................................................................. 236
12.2.2 Settling bank accounts ................................................................................................ 236
12.2.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 237
12.2.2.2 Settling bank accounts ..................................................................................... 238
12.2.2.3 Undoing settlement ........................................................................................... 238
12.3 Analyzing cash concentration ......................................................................................... 238
12.3.1 Running the Settlement report .................................................................................... 238
12.3.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 239
12.3.1.2 Running the Settlement report .......................................................................... 239

13 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes ...................................................................241
13.1 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes ............................................................................... 241
13.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 242
13.1.2 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes ........................................................................... 243
13.2 Undoing interest, fee, and tax calculations .................................................................... 244
13.2.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 244
13.2.2 Undoing interest, fee, and tax calculations ................................................................. 244
13.3 Analyzing interest, fees, and taxes ................................................................................. 245
13.3.1 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report .................................................................. 245
13.3.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 245
13.3.1.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report ........................................................ 246
13.3.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report ................................................. 246
13.3.2.1 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report ....................................... 246
13.3.3 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report ................................ 247
13.3.3.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 247
13.3.3.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report ...................... 247
13.3.4 Running the Credit Line report .................................................................................... 247
13.3.4.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 247
13.3.4.2 Running the Credit Line report ......................................................................... 248
13.3.5 Running the Bank Account Summary report ............................................................... 248
13.3.5.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 248
13.3.5.2 Running the Bank Account Summary report .................................................... 249

14 Reporting to central banks ...................................................................................251
14.1 Managing transaction regulatory codes ......................................................................... 251
14.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 251
14.1.2 Managing transaction regulatory codes ...................................................................... 252
14.2 Analyzing transaction regulatory codes ......................................................................... 252
14.2.1 Running the Central Bank report ................................................................................ 252
14.2.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 252
14.2.1.2 Running the Central Bank report ...................................................................... 253
14.2.2 Running the Regulatory report .................................................................................... 253
14.2.2.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 253
14.2.2.2 Running the Regulatory report ......................................................................... 253

15 Exporting accounting events to ACM .................................................................255
15.1 Generating daily accounting events ............................................................................... 256
15.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 256
15.1.2 Generating daily accounting events ............................................................................ 256
15.2 Reconciling bank balances .............................................................................................. 257
15.2.0.1 Updating and reviewing bank balances ............................................................ 257
15.2.0.2 Reconciling bank balances ............................................................................... 258
15.3 Analyzing accounting events ........................................................................................... 260
15.3.1 Running the Accounting Events report ....................................................................... 260
15.3.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................... 260
15.3.1.2 Running the Accounting Events report ............................................................. 261

16 Trading ...................................................................................................................263
16.1 Entering deals ................................................................................................................... 263
16.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 264
16.1.2 Entering single deals ................................................................................................... 265
16.1.3 Entering multiple deals ................................................................................................ 266
16.2 Editing deals ...................................................................................................................... 266
16.2.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 266
16.2.2 Editing deals ............................................................................................................... 267

17 Commercial lending ..............................................................................................269
17.1 Entering loan drawdowns ................................................................................................ 269
17.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 269
17.1.2 Entering loan drawdowns ............................................................................................ 269
17.2 Running the Loan Monitor ............................................................................................... 270
17.2.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 270
17.2.2 Running the Loan Monitor ........................................................................................... 270

18 Analyzing treasury management .........................................................................271
18.1 Running Treasury Monitor reports .................................................................................. 271
18.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 271
18.1.2 Running position and risk reports ............................................................................... 272
18.2 Running other reports ...................................................................................................... 272
18.2.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 272
18.2.2 Running reports .......................................................................................................... 273
18.2.3 Exporting reports’ data to Microsoft Excel .................................................................. 273

19 Analyzing accounting ...........................................................................................275
19.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................... 275
19.2 Running reports ................................................................................................................ 275
19.3 Exporting reports’ data to Microsoft Excel ..................................................................... 276

WebSuite User Guide

Appendix A: Floats and controlled disbursements ............................................................277
A.1 Setup .................................................................................................................................... 278
A.2 Displaying floats ................................................................................................................. 278
A.3 Displaying controlled disbursements .............................................................................. 280

Appendix B: Settlement rule types.......................................................................................281
B.1 Net settlement ..................................................................................................................... 281
B.2 Gross settlement ................................................................................................................ 282
B.3 Transactional settlement ................................................................................................... 282

Appendix C: Settlement rule methods .................................................................................285
C.1 Intercompany settlement ................................................................................................... 285
C.2 Pool-transfer settlement .................................................................................................... 286
C.3 External-transfer settlement .............................................................................................. 289

Appendix D: Key interest, fee, and tax calculation method components.........................291
D.1 Interest calculation methods ............................................................................................. 291
D.2 Payment periods ................................................................................................................. 292
D.3 Day bases ............................................................................................................................ 292

Appendix E: WebSuite menu options ..................................................................................295

Preface
Introduction
This guide enables users to set up and use WebSuite. Depending on the client site, WebSuite may
contain cash management and/or treasury management functions.
Users should have a general knowledge of the following:

•

Basic cash management and/or treasury management and accounting

•

The Web browser being used to access WebSuite (for example, Microsoft Internet Explorer).

How to use this book
Because you may or may not have both cash management and treasury management installed, this
book refers to the cash management features as "CMM" (cash management module), and the
treasury management features as "TRMWeb" (the web interface to TRM).

Assumptions
This guide assumes the following:

•

You are using the default menu installed with CMM.

•

You have enabled JavaScript by setting the JavaScript Enabled configuration parameter to True.

•

You are using Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Associated documents
Associated documents can be accessed from the Help menu of Wallstreet Suite applications.

Websuite User Guide

All Wallstreet Suite user documentation can be downloaded from the Customer Support site
https://clientextranet.wallstreetsystems.com/Pages/Welcome.aspx

Chapter 1

Overview

1.1 Introduction
This is an overview of the cash management features and the treasury management features of WebSuite. Depending on your installation, you may have both modules or only one of these modules installed. Cash management is described below, for treasury management see 1.3 Treasury
management (TRMWeb) on page 21.

1.1.1 Dashboard
As well as the cash and treasury management features of WebSuite, there is also a link to the
Wallstreet Suite Dashboard (Reporting - Dashboard menu option). The Dashboard application accesses
information that comes from the entire Wallstreet Suite and displays a summarized version within a
window with multiple views. For more information see the TRM User Guide.

1.2 Cash management (CMM)
CMM is a fully web-enabled software application that allows you to deploy optimal centralized or
decentralized cash forecasting and management and fully realize the benefits of in-house banking.

WebSuite User Guide

1.2.1 CMM components
CMM consists of four layers:

For information on these components, see the WSS Cash Management Concepts Guide.

1.2.2 Using CMM
As a user, you are responsible for one or more of the following tasks:
Task
Configure the module

Capture activity

Complete common business applications

Export activity events to ACM

More information
•

Managing static data

•

Managing market data

•

WebSuite System Admin Guide

•

Managing forecasted activity

•

Managing expected and instructed activity

•

Managing bank-reported activity

•

Reconciling activity

•

Monitoring cash position

•

Netting

•

Concentrating cash

•

Calculating interest, fees, and taxes

•

Reporting to central banks

•

Exporting accounting events to ACM

You complete the first of these tasks after your organization has installed CMM but before it begins
to use the module.
You complete the remainder of these tasks on a regular basis after the initial installation and
configuration.

1.3 Treasury management (TRMWeb)
WebSuite includes treasury management functionality for subsidiaries of an organization whose
central treasury uses TRM as its treasury management system. With WebSuite, it is possible for:

•

The subsidiary to enter deal requests and view its position with the treasury through a web
browser

•

The corporate treasuries to extend the centrally-located corporate treasury operations to
anywhere within reach of the web.

Note: The main instruments traded in TRM can also be traded in WebSuite.
When a subsidiary wants to make a deal with the treasury, the standard workflow without
WebSuiteoften starts with a telephone call to the treasury and a request for the latest price or
exchange rate. If the rate is accepted, the treasury enters the transaction in TRM, and mails or faxes
a confirmation to the subsidiary. The subsidiary has to acknowledge the confirmation, often by fax,
and the treasury enters the confirmation in TRM. The transaction can then move on in the
transaction flow. This is a time-consuming process. WebSuite makes the interaction between a
corporate treasury and its subsidiaries effective and efficient.

WebSuite User Guide

Chapter 2

Getting started

WebSuite is the web-based interface of Wallstreet Suite. If you have a user ID and password, you
can access WebSuite using a standard web browser, such as Internet Explorer.
Depending on which modules your organization has purchased, WebSuite contains CMM and subsets
of TRM and ACM. CMM is intended for users who are responsible for cash management in your
organization, while the subsets of TRM and ACM are intended for users who are employed by
subsidiaries of your organization (if your organization’s corporate treasury uses the Windows-based
interface of TRM and ACM).
This section explains how to navigate and use the basic features of WebSuite.

2.1 Navigating WebSuite
Regardless of how your organization has set up WebSuite or your individual role and the particular
functionality you use, you must complete a set of basic tasks to navigate the suite, which are
documented in this section.

2.1.1 Logging in and out
You can log into and out of WebSuite using a standard web browser.
To start your session, you need to launch your browser, open the login page, and enter your user ID
and password. After you have completed your session, the logout function allows you to end it in a
secure manner without closing your browser.

Note: WebSuite supports strong authentication with PKI X509. If your organization uses this

authentication, registered users can log in automatically without providing a separate user
name or password for WebSuite after they have been authenticated by the web server.

2.1.1.1 Logging in
To log in:
1. Launch your browser.
2. In the Address field, enter your organization’s URL for WebSuite and press the Enter key.

WebSuite User Guide

Your system administrator can provide you with this URL.
When you enter this URL, the application server redirects your browser to the actual URL of the
login page. If you want to create a favorite link to the login page, always use the URL you
manually type in and not the one the application server redirects your browser to, as this one
may change from version to version.

Note: Alternatively, if you access WebSuite using the Apache server, then enter its URL to open
the startup screen, then click the WebSuite icon.

3. Enter your user name in the User ID field.
Your system administrator can provide you with your user name.
4. Enter your user password in the Password field.
Your system administrator can provide you with your user password.
5. Click Login.

2.1.1.2 Logging out
To log out:
1. Click

in the top-right corner of WebSuite.

2.1.2 Navigating the menu
To use a function in WebSuite, you must first navigate to and open that function through the menu.

2.1.2.1 Defining components of the menu
The menu consists of three components:

Most functions display in menu subgroups. However, Some commonly used functions display at the
top of their menu groups rather than in subgroups.

2.1.2.2 Opening functions
The following example explains how to open a function:
1. Place your cursor over Payment Factory to open its menu group.

2. Place your cursor over Processing to open its menu subgroup.

WebSuite User Guide

3. Click Edit Transactions.

In Wallstreet Suite documentation, menu selections such as the one above are indicated as follows:
Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.

Note: As you navigate WebSuite, you can return to previously viewed functions by clicking the
appropriate links above the page titles.

2.1.3 Searching for functions and managing favorites
You can search for functions containing specified words or phrases. In addition, you can designate
commonly used functions as personal favorites.

Note: The procedure for managing favorites depends on whether you are using TRM, ACM, or all
three modules or are using only CMM.

2.1.3.1 Searching for functions
To search for a CMM function:
1. Click

2. In the Link Search page, enter a word or phrase in the Link Contains field.
The search feature only displays functions with names that contain the exact word or phrase you
enter in the field. For example, if you enter payment, the Enter Intercompany Payment and Edit

WebSuite User Guide

Intercompany Payment functions appear in the results; however, if you enter payments, they do
not appear in the results. Also, results are limited to functions that the user is allowed to access.
3. Click Search.
4. Click the function’s link to open it.

2.1.3.2 Managing favorites
To add a function to your favorites:
1. Navigate to the function.
2. Click

The function is now included in your browser’s favorites or bookmarks.

Note: For information on managing favorites, see your browser’s help.

2.1.4 Accessing secured functionality and data
WebSuite includes extensive security functionality. This functionality allows your organization to
secure access to the modules’ functionality and data.

2.1.4.1 Accessing secured functionality and data
Your organization can secure WebSuite so that each user can only access functionality and data
assigned to him or her. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

2.1.4.2 Reauthenticating your identity
Your organization can select specific business processes, such as releasing of payments, to require
you to reauthenticate your identity. If you attempt to complete one of these processes, the following
window displays:

In this window, enter your password and click Authenticate. If you enter your password correctly, the
window closes and the process continues. Otherwise, the window remains open and you must enter
your password and click Authenticate again. If you do not enter your password correctly within the
number of times defined by the Maximum Number of Unsuccessful Login Attempts configuration
parameter, your user account is locked and the process is not completed.
If you subscribe to the User Re-authentication Successful or User Re-authentication Failed events,
WebSuite notifies you each time you or another user reauthenticates or fails to reauthenticate. In
addition, you can audit these events.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

2.1.5 Selecting a startup page
If you select a startup page, that page displays when you first log into WebSuite.
In most functions, you can only use the first page as your selected startup page.
The default startup page is the Daily Activity Report page.

2.1.5.1 Selecting a startup page
To select a startup page:
1. Navigate to the page.
2. Click

2.1.5.2 Opening the startup page
As previously noted, after you have selected a startup page, that page displays when you first log
into WebSuite.
You can also open the startup page at any time during your session by clicking

2.1.5.3 Clearing the startup page selection
You can clear the startup page selection in the User Options function. For more information, see
“Setting your user options” on page 51.

2.1.6 Using HTTPS in Internet Explorer
If your organization is using WebSuite with HTTPS and you are using the horizontal menu format,
the Security Information dialog displays at least once each time you open a page in Internet
Explorer:

You can do the following:

•

To close the dialog each time it displays, you can click Yes or No.

•

To prevent the dialog from displaying, you can modify your security settings as documented in
the remainder of this section.

2.1.6.1 Adding WebSuite to your local intranet
In some situations, WebSuite may not be part of your local intranet (for example, you may be
logging into WebSuite from a remote location). In these situations, Internet rather than Local
intranet displays in the bottom-right corner of the Internet Explorer window when you are logged
into WebSuite:

WebSuite User Guide

If WebSuite is not part of your local intranet, Wallstreet recommends you add it before completing
the procedure in the next section.
To add WebSuite to your local intranet:
1. In the Internet Explorer menu, select Tools - Internet Options….
2. In the Internet Options dialog, open the Security tab.
3. Select the Local intranet icon and click Sites….
4. In the first Local Intranet dialog, click Advanced….
5. In the second Local Intranet dialog, enter WebSuite’s URL in the Add this Web site to the zone field.
6. Click Add.
7. Click OK.
8. In the first Local Intranet dialog, click OK.
9. In the Internet Options dialog, click OK.

2.1.6.2 Changing your security settings for WebSuite
To prevent the Security Information dialog from displaying in WebSuite, you need to change your
security settings as documented in this section.
To change your security settings for WebSuite:
1. In the Internet Explorer menu, select Tools - Internet Options….
2. In the Internet Options dialog, open the Security tab.
3. Do one of the following:

–

If WebSuite is part of your local intranet, select the Local intranet icon.

–

If WebSuite is not part of your local intranet, select the Internet icon.

Wallstreet recommends that WebSuite be part of your local intranet. For more information, see
the previous section.
4. Click Custom Level….
5. In the Security Settings dialog, scroll to the Display mixed content set of option buttons (under
Miscellaneous) in the Settings list.
6. Select the Disable or Enable option button.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Internet Options dialog, click OK.

2.2 Working with data
WebSuite includes an extensive, standardized set of features for searching for, viewing, and
entering data.

2.2.1 Searching for data
Your organization’s Wallstreet Suite database contains information on parties, bank accounts,
transactions, and other critical data. Most functions include features that allow you to search for
these data in a methodical fashion.
Search pages allow you to enter criteria and then search the Wallstreet Suite database for all entries
that match those criteria.

2.2.1.1 Understanding key features of search
The following are key features of search in WebSuite:
Feature

Description

Intersecting
criteria

Unless otherwise noted, the results of a search page are based on intersections of the search
page’s criteria. For example, if you select an entity of Acme USA and a currency of USD in
the Edit Transactions function’s criteria, only transactions with entities of Acme USA and
currencies of US dollar display in the results. A transaction with an entity of Acme USA and a
currency of euro does not display in the results. Similarly, a transaction with an entity of
Acme UK and a currency of US dollar does not display in the results.

Wild cards

Wild cards, which are special symbols that stand for one or more characters in searches (for
example, * in Microsoft Windows), are not required in WebSuite. Instead, when you enter a
term in a search field, WebSuite searches for all records that contain that term. If you enter
Acme in an entity field, WebSuite searches for all entities with Acme in their names (for
example, Acme United Kingdom, Acme United States, Acme Japan) and not just an entity
named Acme.
The exceptions to this rule are the Enter Bank Transactions, Cash Monitor, and Cash Position
functions, which do support use of wild cards in filtering of lists.

Case
insensitivity

Search results are case insensitive. Searching for

Search field
lists

Some fields include a list that allows you to define what entries WebSuite should search for
based on the contents of the field:

Acme Canada, acme canada, and

ACME CANADA generate the same result.

The options in these lists vary depending on whether the contents of the related field are
character, number, or date based. If the input field is character based (for example, Acme

Germany), the list contains:
•

Contains

•

Begins with

•

Ends with

•

Equal to

•

Not equal to.

If the input field is number or date based (for example,

Multiple
clicking of
buttons

•

>=.

500), the list contains:

In most situations, when you double click a button or link, WebSuite ignores the second
click. If you click the button or link a third time, a dialog displays stating that the process is
in progress and further clicking is not required. The exceptions to this rule are Select All,
Deselect All, and Reset, which you may need to click more than once in a single instance.

WebSuite User Guide

2.2.1.2 Searching for data
To search for data (example):
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter wide date ranges in the Transaction Date
From and To and Value Date From and To fields, such as a month or a year.
3. Leave the remaining criteria set to their default values.
4. Click Search.
Because you specified a broad range of criteria in the previous steps, the Transactions List page
displays all transactions in the database for the selected transaction and value date ranges. You
can specify criteria to narrow this list of results.
5. In the Transactions List page, click Search.
6. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, select a specific entity in the Entity list.
7. Click Search.
If, after you specify criteria, the Transactions List page displays only the table header, no
records match your criteria. Before you conclude that no records exist in the category, check or
alter your criteria and try the search again.
Search results display high-level information. To obtain detailed information about an individual
entry, click that entry’s drilldown link. For more information, see Viewing data using tables and
drilldowns.

2.2.2 Viewing data using tables and drilldowns
WebSuite displays records and other such information in tables. In some situations, if there are
more entries in a table than WebSuite can reasonably display in a single page, it presents the table
across multiple pages.
Most tables in WebSuite include a sort feature. This feature displays as and in the table’s header
if it is available. By changing the sort methods, you may find that certain records are easier to locate
in a large table.
Drilling down for further information is a concept used throughout WebSuite. When you are
browsing through information, that information is usually presented in a table of items such as
entities, bank accounts, or transactions. An individual record in such a table may contain one or
more links, which you can use to drill down to more specific information. Links can be either a word
or phrase (usually underlined), or a bullet:

2.2.2.1 Navigating tables across multiple pages
To navigate tables across multiple pages (example):
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter wide date ranges in the Transaction Date
From and To and Value Date From and To fields, such as a month or a year.
3. Leave the remaining criteria set to their default values.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Transactions List page, scroll to the bottom of the table and note the pagination links that
display below the table.
6. Do one of the following:

–

To open a particular page, click its link.

–

To open the next group of pages, click Next.

–

To open the previous group of pages, click Prev.

You can define the number of pages that display before and after the current page in the
pagination hyperlinks by setting the Scroll Page Count configuration parameter. For more
information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

2.2.2.2 Sorting tables
To sort tables (example):
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter wide date ranges in the Transaction Date
From and To and Value Date From and To fields, such as a month or a year.
3. Leave the remaining criteria set to their default values.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Transactions List page, click in the Actual Amount column.
6. Click

in the Actual Txn Date column.

2.2.2.3 Drilling down
To drill down (example):
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter wide date ranges in the Transaction Date
From and To and Value Date From and To fields, such as a month or a year.
3. Leave the remaining criteria set to their default values.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Transactions List page, click a new or incomplete transaction’s link.
6. In the Edit Transaction page, click on the Additional Attributes section header.

2.2.3 Entering data
In WebSuite, as in other software applications, you enter data using the following set of controls:

•

Field: Enter a value manually.

WebSuite User Guide

•

List: Select a value from a list.

•

Multiple selection list: Select multiple values from a list.

•

Option button: Select one of several options.

•

Checkbox: Enable or disable an option.

Controls with blue labels are required; you must enter data in these controls to proceed. If you do
not enter data in a required control and then click a button or link to proceed to the next page, the
current page remains open and an appropriate message displays beside the control:

2.2.3.1 Using text fields
Entering data in a text field involves three steps:
1. Place your cursor over the field and click once.
2. Enter data in the field.
3. Navigate to the next field by placing your cursor over it and clicking it or by pressing the Tab
key.
Unless otherwise indicated, text fields in WebSuite can accept all characters that are supported by
UTF-8 encoding (see the UTF-8 website).

2.2.3.2 Using number fields
When entering information in number fields, include only the digits themselves and the decimal
point where necessary. Do not include, currency symbols ($, £) or percent symbols (%).
You can select one of the following as your default format for numbers in CMM:
Positive numbers

Negative numbers

###,###.00

(###,###.00)

###,###.00

-###,###.00

###,###.00 C

###,###.00 D

###,###.00 CR

###,###.00 DB

###.###,00

(###.###,00)

###.###,00

-###.###,00

###.###,00 C

###.###,00 D

###.###,00 CR

###.###,00 DB

CMM displays numbers in your default format and validates numbers you enter against it. For more
information on selecting your default format, see “Setting your user options” on page 51.

Note: When validating numbers, CMM uses all number formats with the same decimal point and
thousand separator as your default format. It rejects any numbers that do not use the
decimal point and thousand separator. For example, if your preferred number format is
###,###.00, CMM rejects 123.456,78.

Some number fields allow you to truncate large, round numbers with a K for thousand, M for million,
or B for billion (one thousand million).

Note: The K, M, and B are not case sensitive; you can also enter k, m, and b.
The following table presents examples:
For this number

Enter

45,000

45K

3,600,000

3.6M

2,000,000,000

If you use one of these truncators in a number field and then navigate to another control on the
page, CMM converts the truncator to the number it represents. For example, if you enter 3.6M in a
number field then navigate to another control on the page, CMM changes 3.6M to 3,600,000 in the
number field.

2.2.3.3 Using date fields
You can define the default display format for dates in CMM. For more information, see “Setting your
user options” on page 51.
When you enter a date in a field, CMM first determines if the date matches your default display
format. If it does, CMM accepts the date. Otherwise, it checks the date for a match with another
standard date format. CMM checks dates against formats in the following order and accepts on first
match:
Format

July 1, 2005, in the format

MM/DD/YY

07/01/05

WebSuite User Guide

DD/MM/YY

01/07/05

YY/MM/DD

05/07/01

DD/MMM/YY

01/Jul/05

MMM DD, YYYY

Jul 01, 2005

MMM YY

Jul 05

MM-DD-YYYY

07-01-2005

DD-MM-YYYY

01-07-2005

YYYY-MM-DD

2005-07-01

The characters you use to separate the day, month, and year—which are referred to as delimiters—
are interchangeable. For example, 2005-07-01, 2005/07/01, and 2005.07.01 are acceptable entries
for July 1, 2005, in the YYYY-MM-DD format. CMM does not support dates entered without delimiters
(for example, 20050701).
Dates very far in the past, such as January 1, 1901, are considered invalid.

2.2.3.3.1 Using popup calendars
If you have enabled popup calendars, you can also enter dates by clicking the popup calendar icon
beside a date field and then searching for and selecting the appropriate date in the resulting
calendar window:

For more information, see “Setting your user options” on page 51.

2.2.3.3.2 Using date abbreviations
In the date fields, you can enter the following basic abbreviations:
For this date

Enter

Today

First day of the current week (Sunday)

Last day of the current week (Saturday)

First day of the current month

Last day of the current month

First day of the current year

Last day of the current year

As the following examples show, you can add or subtract days (D), months (M), or years (Y) to these
basic abbreviations:
No.

Abbreviation

Current day

Resulting day

+7D

Monday, June 5, 2006

Monday, June 12, 2006

-Y

Monday, June 5, 2006

Sunday, June 5, 2005

T+7D

Monday, June 5, 2006

Monday, June 12, 2006

T-1Y

Monday, June 5, 2006

Sunday, June 5, 2005

SW-2D

Monday, June 5, 2006

Friday, June 2, 2006

EW+1M

Monday, June 5, 2006

Monday, July 10, 2006

SM-2Y

Monday, June 5, 2006

Tuesday, June 1, 2004

EM+2M

Monday, June 5, 2006

Wednesday, August 30, 2006

SY-3M

Monday, June 5, 2006

Saturday, October 1, 2005

EY-7D

Monday, June 5, 2006

Sunday, December 24, 2006

In examples 1 to 2, you can place spaces between the operators, numbers, and units. For example,
+ 7 D, +7 D, and + 7D are acceptable.
In examples 3 to 10, you can place spaces between the base dates, the operators, and the
increments. However, you cannot place spaces between the numbers and units in the increments. In
addition, the increments must contain both numbers and units. For example, SW - 2D, SW -2D, and
SW- 2D are acceptable, but SW-2 D, SW-2, and SW-D are not acceptable.
In most situations, if you add or subtract a month in a date field, the resulting date is exactly one
month before or one month after the base date. For example, if you enter +M in a date field and the
current date is June 5, 2006, the resulting date is July 5, 2006. However, if the current date is the
29th, 30th, or 31st and the previous or next month does not have a 29th, 30th, or 31st, the
resulting date is the last date of that month. For example, if you enter +M in a date field and the
current date is January 31, 2006, the resulting date is February 29, 2006.
If you use one of these abbreviations in a date field and then navigate to another control on the
page, CMM converts the abbreviation to the date it represents. For example, if you enter T+7D in a
date field and then navigate to another control on the page, CMM changes T+7D to 10/Jul/06 in the
date field (assuming today is July 3, 2006, and your default date format is DD/MMM/YY).

Note: As with the large number truncators, these abbreviations are not case sensitive.

WebSuite User Guide

2.2.3.4 Using lists
Wallstreet Suite supports two types of list:

•

Standard

•

As-you-type.

Note: As of this release, as-you-type lists are only available in the Enter Bank Transactions
function.

2.2.3.4.1 Using standard lists
To use standard lists:
1. Click the down arrow beside the list.

2. Select a value from the list by placing your cursor over that value and clicking it.
Any values that are in the list but not in the database are prefixed with Unavailable.
If the JavaScript Enabled configuration parameter is set to True, you can type the first letters of
the value you want to select to scroll to and highlight that value in the list. For more information,
see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
3. Should you select the wrong value, repeat the above steps to select the correct one.
A filtering feature displays after some lists, allowing you to filter the values in the list:

Depending on how you set the Maximum Number of Rows in Combo Box Before Filtering is
Enabled configuration parameter, the list may contain all available values before filtering or only
a set number of values (for example, 100). For more information, see the WebSuite System
Admin Guide.
In addition, you can select default values for entity and currency lists. For more information, see
“Setting your user options” on page 51.

2.2.3.4.2 Using as-you-type lists
Select fields in the Enter Bank Transactions function display a list of possible values as you type. For
example, as you type Acme in the Party Name field, a list displays that contains all entities starting with
Acme:

If you select one of these entities, it populates the Party Name field.
To search for values that contain specific characters (instead of starting with the characters), type
an asterisk followed by the characters. For example, if you type *U in the Party Name field, a list
displays that contains all entities with U in their names:

Note: The possible values that can display in as-you-type lists are determined when you first log
into WebSuite. Therefore, if you or another user enters or modifies static data while you
are logged in, these changes will not be reflected in the as-you-type lists until you log out
and back in again.

2.2.3.5 Using multiple selection lists
Like a list, a multiple selection list allows you to select values. However, unlike a list, a multiple
selection list allows you to select one or more values and—in some situations—define the order of
selected values:

2.2.3.5.1 Selecting values in multiple selection lists
To select values in a multiple selection list:

•

To add one or more values to your selection, select them in the list of available values (on the
left) and click Add Selected >>.

•

To add all values to your selection, click Add All >>.

•

To remove one or more values from your selection, select them in the list of assigned values (on
the right) and click << Remove Selected.

•

To remove all values from your selection, click << Remove All.

To select multiple values in a list, select the first value, press and hold down the Ctrl key on your
keyboard, and select the remaining values one at a time.
Some multiple selection lists include filter fields. You can use these fields to filter the list of available
values.

2.2.3.5.2 Sorting values in multiple selection lists
In some multiple selection lists, you can change the order of assigned values. The order of assigned
values in a multiple selection list is important in several functions, particularly those using the
flexible reporting framework. (In flexible reporting framework functions, the order of assigned
values in the multiple selection lists of a format determines the order of attributes in the format’s
reports or worksheets.)

WebSuite User Guide

To sort values in a multiple selection list:
1. Ensure the list of assigned values contains all values you want to include in your selection.
2. For each value, do the following:

–

To move the value up in the list, select it and click .

–

To move the value down in the list, select it and click .

2.2.3.6 Using checkboxes
A checkbox indicates an option that can be turned on or off, or set to true or false.
When a checkbox is selected (in other words, there is a checkmark in the box), its option is
activated or set to true:

When a checkbox is cleared (in other words, there is no checkmark in the box), its option is
deactivated or set to false:

To change a checkbox’s status, click it.

2.2.3.7 Using option buttons
Option buttons (or "radio buttons") always appear in groups. You can select only one option button
in a group at a time.
When a bullet displays in an option button, its option is selected:

When no bullet displays in an option button, its option is not selected:

To select an option button, click it. All other option buttons in the group are cleared.
To select another option button in the same group, click it. That option button is selected and the
other one is cleared.

2.3 Running reports and worksheets
CMM and TRM include a set of reports and worksheets that you can run in WebSuite to analyze your
organization’s cash and treasury management activities.

2.3.1 Running CMM reports and worksheets
After you or another user have created a report template in a CMM flexible reporting framework
function, you can run reports or worksheets based on that report template.

Note: The following sections is applicable to all functions based on the flexible reporting

framework except Cash Monitor and Cash Position. For information on the Cash Monitor
and Cash Position function, see Running CMM Cash Monitor and Cash Position reports.

2.3.1.1 Running reports and worksheets
To run reports or worksheets:
1. Select the appropriate function:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template but do not want to use the report or
worksheet based on your favorite report template, click Return to List and continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template and want to use the report or worksheet
based on your favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the function’s report template list page, select Report in the appropriate report template’s row.
3. In the report or worksheet based on the report template, make any appropriate changes to the
criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

2.3.1.2 Selecting favorite report templates
You can select one report template in each flexible reporting framework function as your favorite.
When you open the function, a report or worksheet based on the report template automatically
displays.

Note: Your favorite report templates are unique to you and do not impact other users. For

example, you can select Acme USA Cash Report as your default report template in the
Cash Transaction Report function while another user can select Acme UK Cash Report as
his or her default report template in the same function.

To select a favorite report template:
1. Select the appropriate function.
If you previously selected one of the function’s existing report templates as a favorite, click
Return to List.
2. In the function’s report template list page, select the report template’s Favorite option button.
3. Click Save Favorite.
You can remove your favorite report template selection by clicking Remove Favorite Indicator in the
function’s report template list page.

2.3.1.3 Hiding report templates
To hide a report template:
1. Select the appropriate function.
If you previously selected one of the function’s existing report templates as a favorite, click
Return to List to open the function’s report template list page.
2. In the function’s report template list page:

–

To hide the report template from other users, select Installation in the Show/Hide list in the
report template’s row.

–

To show the report template from other users, select Personal in the Show/Hide list in the
report template’s row.

The Show/Hide lists only display if you have security access to FG-0393 Report Administrator.
3. Click Hide in the report template’s row.
To show a hidden report template, click Show Hidden Reports and then click Show in the report
template’s row.

WebSuite User Guide

2.3.2 Running CMM Cash Monitor and Cash Position reports
After you or another user have created a report template in the Cash Monitor function, you can run
reports based on that report template.

2.3.2.1 Running reports
To run a report:
1. Select the appropriate function:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template but do not want to use the report based
on your favorite report template, click Return to List and continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template and want to use the report based on
your favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the function’s report template list page, do one of the following:

–

Drill down on the appropriate report template by clicking its link.

–

Drill down on the appropriate report template by using the menu:
a. Click

in the report template’s row.

b. Select Run in the resulting menu.

–

Drill down on the appropriate report template by using the toolbar:
a. Select the report template’s row.
b. Click

3. In the report based on the report template, make any appropriate changes to the criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

2.3.2.2 Selecting favorite report templates
You can select one report template in the FG-0338 Cash Monitor or Cash Position function as your
favorite. When you open the function, a report based on the report template automatically displays.

Note: Your favorite report templates are unique to you and do not impact other users. For

example, you can select Acme USA Cash Report as your default report template while
another user can select Acme UK Cash Report as his or her default report template.

–

Select the favorite report template by using the menu:
a. Click

in the report template’s row.

b. Select Set as Favorite in the resulting menu.

–

Select the favorite report template by using the toolbar:
a. Select the report template’s row.
b. Click

To remove a favorite report template selection:
1. Select the appropriate function.
2. In the report template page, click Return to List.
3. In the function’s report template list page, do one of the following:

–

Remove the favorite report template selection by using the menu:
a. Click

in the report template’s row.

b. Select Remove as Favorite in the resulting menu.

–

Remove the favorite report template selection by using the toolbar:
a. Select the report template’s row.
b. Click

2.3.2.3 Hiding report templates
The Cash Monitor and Cash Position functions can contain many report templates. To make the
functions more manageable, you can hide select report templates (either for you only or for all
users).

Note: To use this functionality, you need security access to FG-0393 Report Administrator.
To hide a report template:
1. Select the appropriate function.
If you previously selected one of the function’s existing report templates as a favorite, click
Return to List.
2. In the function’s report template list page, do one of the following:

–

Hide the report template by using the menu:
a. Click

in the report template’s row.

b. In the resulting menu:

–

Select Hide (Personal) to hide the report template for you only

–

Select Hide (Installation) to hide the report template for all users.

Hide the report template by using the toolbar:
a. Select the report template’s row.
b. Click
c.

In the resulting dialog:

–

Click Personal to hide the report template for you only

–

Click Installation to hide the report template for all users.

To show a hidden report template:
1. Select the appropriate function.

WebSuite User Guide

If you previously selected one of the function’s existing report templates as a favorite, click
Return to List.
2. In the function’s report template list page, click

3. Do one of the following:

–

Show the report template by using the menu:
a. Click

in the report template’s row.

b. Select Unhide in the resulting menu.

–

Show the report template by using the toolbar:
a. Select the report template’s row.
b. Click

2.4 Using information features
WebSuite’s information features allow you to view and analyze critical data.

2.4.1 Working with confirmation and error messages
Confirmation and error messages provide important information about background functionality in
WebSuite.

2.4.1.1 Working with confirmation messages
When you complete a task that creates, edits, or deletes an entry in the database or makes a similar
change, WebSuite displays a message above the page’s title confirming the success or failure of
your task:

If your task failed, the confirmation message indicates why it failed and, if possible, explains what
measures you can take to complete the task successfully.

2.4.1.2 Working with error messages
Error messages, which are generated by the application server rather than WebSuite, indicate a bug
or other problem:

If you encounter one of these messages while working in WebSuite, submit it to Wallstreet, which
will analyze the message and correct the underlying problem.
To submit an error message to Wallstreet:
1. Ensure the page with the error message is open.
2. Select View - Source.

3. In Microsoft Notepad, save the file in text (.txt) format with an appropriate name.
4. E-mail the file to Wallstreet.

2.4.2 Working with daily bulletins
Daily bulletins are messages that your organization can post in CMM and that are applicable to all
users.

2.4.2.1 Creating daily bulletins
To create a daily bulletin:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Daily Bulletins - Configuration Checking - Enter Daily Bulletins.
2. In the CMM Bulletin Entry page, enter the daily bulletin’s message in the New Bulletin field.
3. Click Save.

2.4.2.2 Deleting daily bulletins
To delete a daily bulletin:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Daily Bulletins - Configuration Checking - Enter Daily Bulletins.
2. In the CMM Bulletin Entry page, click Clear.

2.4.2.3 Reviewing daily bulletins
To review daily bulletins, select Admin - Utilities - Daily Bulletins - Configuration Checking - View Daily Bulletins.

WebSuite User Guide

2.4.3 Viewing CMM environment information
The Session Info. function displays relevant information about the CMM environment, including the
following:

•

Current version

•

Installation (including installed database)

•

Your user ID, name, and duration of current session

•

Number of cash records and bank transactions in the database

•

Number of entities, counterparties, and bank accounts in the database.

To access the Session Info. function, select Admin - Utilities - Analysis - Session Info..

2.5 Using help
This section explains how to use the help provided with WebSuite.

2.5.1 Opening help
To open help, click
components:

. The help opens in a separate browser window or tab, and consists of three

The page that displays in the body pane contains information relevant to your current context in
WebSuite. For example, if you are entering a forecast in CMM and click
pane contains information on entering forecasts.

, the page in the body

The navigation panes allow you to navigate and search help. To display a specific pane (for example,
Search), click its name in the bottom-left corner of the help.
You can expand or collapse the navigation panes by clicking the following button on the toolbar:

2.5.2 Navigating help
You can navigate help using the table or contents or the index. The table of contents and index are
similar in structure and function to the tables of contents and indexes in printed books.
To navigate help using the table of contents:
1. Open the Contents pane.
2. Do one of the following:

–

To open a section (or "book"), click it.
The section’s bullet changes from
to , the section’s contents (child sections, pages, or
both) display below it in the table of contents, and the section’s home page displays in the
body pane.

–

To open a page, click it.
The page opens in the body pane.
There are a set of links at the top of each page that indicate its location in the table of
contents:

To navigate help using the index:
1. Open the Index pane.
2. In the field at the top of the Index pane, begin entering a word or words.
The list in the Index pane automatically scrolls to the index term that most closely matches your
word or words.
3. Click an index term:

–

If there is one page associated with the index term, the page opens in the body pane.

–

If there is more than one page associated with the index term, a popup menu displays:

In the popup menu, select a page to open it in the body pane.

WebSuite User Guide

2.5.3 Searching help
You can search all pages or the currently open page for a specific word or phrase. This is useful
when you need information but cannot find it in the table of contents or index.
To search all pages:
1. Open the Search pane.
2. In the field at the top of the Search pane, enter the word or words for which you want to search.
When searching for two or more words, use one of the following forms:
Example

Description

central bank

Displays all pages containing "central", "bank", or both "central" and
"bank".

central+bank

Displays all pages containing both "central" and "bank".

"central bank"

Displays all pages containing "central bank".

3. Click Search.
The resulting list displays all pages that contain the word or words you entered in step 2. By
default, the page with the most occurrences of the word or words displays first in the list and the
page with the fewest occurrences of the word or words displays last in the list. However, you can
change the sort order of the list by clicking the Rank and Title column headers.
When you click a page in the list, the page opens in the body pane.

To search the current open page:
1. In the field in the toolbar, enter the word or words for which you want to search.
2. Click the following button on the toolbar:

Search is not case sensitive. When searching for two or more words, use one of the following forms:
Example

Description

central bank

Displays all pages containing "central", "bank", or both "central" and
"bank".

central+bank

Displays all pages containing both "central" and "bank".

"central bank"

Displays all pages containing "central bank".

All occurrences of the word or words for which you are searching are highlighted in the pages. You
can remove this highlighting by clicking the following button in the toolbar:

2.5.4 Marking and viewing favorites
If you view a specific page in the help on a regular basis, you can mark this page as a favorite. To do
this, navigate to the page and click the following button in the toolbar:

Similarly, you can mark a search query as a favorite. To do this, search for a word or words in all
pages following the procedure in the preceding section and then click the following button in the
Search pane:

To view your favorites, open the Favorites pane.

Note: In addition to viewing favorites, you can delete them in this pane by selection their
checkboxes and clicking the appropriate

When you mark a page or search query as a favorite, it is saved as a cookie. Therefore:

•

If you disable support for cookies in your browser, you cannot mark or view favorites.

•

If you delete cookies, you lose your favorites.

•

If you log into WebSuite from another browser, you cannot view your favorites.

2.5.5 Using other help features
The help includes features in addition to those documented in the preceding sections:
Feature

Description

Glossary terms

Green, underlined words in pages are linked to the help’s glossary. To view the
definition of a marked term, click it. A popup window displays:

When you are done reading the definition, click anywhere outside of the popup window
to close it.
Open the Glossary pane to view definitions of all terms in the help’s glossary.

WebSuite User Guide

Archive

The file is formatted correctly and imported successfully. However, the file may still
contain content errors.

Error

The file contains a syntax error or is a duplicate.

UFO

The file’s format is not recognizable.

If CMM moves a file to the Archive or Error folder, it changes the file’s extension to .old.
CMM displays the number of files it attempted to import, the number it imported successfully, and
the number it did not import successfully:

You can drill down on the numbers to view related records in the job log. (This is useful when you
want to determine why CMM did not import a file successfully.)

3.2.4 Capturing and maintaining tiered interest rates
Using the Tiered Interest Rates function, you can capture a scenario in which CMM applies multiple
interest rates to a bank account or deal using one of two types of rules:

•

Single-rate

•

Multiple-rate.

The following are two sets of tiered interest calculation rules. The first is a single-rate rule, and the
second is a multiple-rate rule:
Lower limit (in USD)

Upper limit (in USD)

Rule A (single-rate)

Rule B (multiple-rate)

10,000 (inclusive)

2.0%

10,000 (exclusive)

100,000 (inclusive)

4.0%

100,000 (exclusive)

Infinity

6.0%

The following table shows how these two rules apply interest to a set of example balances:
Rule A
(single-rate)

Balance (in USD)

Rule B (multiple-rate)

5,000

Apply 2.0%
interest.

Apply 2.0% interest.

50,000

Apply 4.0%
interest.

Apply 2.0% interest to the portion of the balance between USD 0
and 10,000 (inclusive).
Apply 4.0% interest to the remainder.

150,000

Apply 6.0%
interest

Apply 2.0% interest to the portion of the balance between USD 0
and 10,000 (inclusive).
Apply 4.0% interest to the portion of the balance between USD
10,000 (exclusive) and 100,000 (inclusive).
Apply 6.0% interest to the remainder.

3.2.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for capturing and maintaining tiered interest rates:
Category

Tasks

Market data

Ensure the following market data are available:

Security

•

Tiered interest rate categories (see Managing interest rate categories)

•

Tiered interest rate types (see Managing interest rate types)

•

Interest rates (see Capturing and maintaining interest rates).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0268 Tiered Interest Rates.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

3.2.4.2 Capturing and maintaining tiered interest rates
To capture and maintain tiered interest rates:
1. Select Admin - Market Data - Interest - Tiered Interest Rates.
2. In the Tiered Interest Rate Type Amount Range - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Tiered Interest Rate Type Amount Range [list] page, click Rate Type in the first interest rate
type’s row.
5. In the Tiered Interest Rate Type Amount Range [editor] page:
a. Do one of the following:

–

Enter the starting amount for the tier in the From field.

–

Set the starting amount to negative infinity by selecting the Minimum checkbox.

b. Do one of the following:

–

Enter the ending amount for the tier in the To field.

–

Set the ending amount to positive infinity by selecting the Maximum checkbox.

6. Click Save.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each of the remaining types.
8. In the Tiered Interest Rate Type Amount Range [list] page, click Save.
You can delete the tier information for a particular interest rate type by clicking Delete in its row.

3.3 Managing foreign exchange rates (and related data)
Wallstreet Suite uses foreign exchange rates to convert amounts from one currency to another.
Foreign exchange rates in Websuite are directly available from the TRM FX Pricing serviced process.

Note: In CMM, foreign exchange rates are expressed in relation to a base currency defined by the
Foreign Exchange Base Currency configuration parameter (see the WebSuite System
Admin Guide). In other words, a foreign exchange rate in CMM is an amount of currency
required to purchase one unit of the base currency.

3.3.1 Reviewing foreign exchange rate sources
Wallstreet Suite shares FX Rate scenarios between the various applications. For information on
capturing and maintaining Scenarios in TRM, see the TRM User Guide.
Foreign exchange rate source mapping is available from Admin - Market Data - Foreign Exchange - FX Rate
Scenario Mapping. You can map foreign exchange rate sources to the following processes in the FX Rate
Scenario Mapping function:

•

Generate Internal Bank Transaction

•

External On Behalf Of Record

•

Simple External Record

•

Simple Internal Record

•

Internal On Behalf Of Record

Note: For all other processes (including the generation of cross-currency transactions), CMM
uses the foreign exchange rate scenario with the ID of 1, which is usually the FREEZE
scenario.

Generate Internal Bank Transaction
It is possible to control the FX rate scenario to be used during generating Internal Bank Transactions
for cross currency records.
When no conversion is done on the internal cash record, the amount in original currency and
amount in Bank Account Currency is kept. Whether or not there is a conversion is controlled by the
Intercompany Transaction Foreign Exchange Conversion Required configuration parameter. The
Generate Internal Bank Transaction (GIBT) process creates a Bank Transaction with an FX
conversion as the currency of the transaction is different from the bank account currency. You can
use this to select the scenario used to get the FX rate used for converting the record amount into
bank account currency amount.
For more information on running the GIBT process, see 7.2.4.3 Generating internal bank
transactions on page 145.

Cash Record Creation
In Cash Record Creation, there are the following types of scenarios:

•

External On Behalf Of Record
A payment is made from an internal account in a currency different from the account currency to
an external counterparty. As the payment originating account is internal, there is an executor
selection to execute the payment on behalf of the original entity.
Example: Entity 1 Pays USD to External Counterparty from an internal Account in EUR:

Records:

Party

1 Entity
1

Party
Bank

IHB

WebSuite User Guide

Party
Acct

EUR@
IHB

Bank
Account
CCY

Amount

EUR

100

CCY

Amount
in Bank
Account

P/
R

Cpty

Cpty
Bank

IS
OBO

Ext
Cpty

EXT
Bank

Ccy
USD

2 IHB

Ext
Bank

USD@
EXT
BANK

USD

100

USD

100

Ext
Cpty

EXT
Bank

This parameter controls the conversion on the cash record between Entity 1 and the external
counterparty, that is the conversion on the first record.
From a technical stand point, in the Cash Record table:

•

–

Intercompany=0 and

–

OBOID != null (ISOBO could be equal to 1 or 0)

Simple External Record:
In this scenario, the counterparty is external, bank accounts are external and the record is in a
currency different from the bank account currency.
From a technical stand point, in the Cash Record table:

–

Intercompany=0 and

–

OBOID=null (ISOBO will always be 0)

Note: This is only possible if the Allow Cross Currency Transactions configuration parameter is
set to True.

•

Simple Internal Record
This scenario applies to records between internal entities settled either on external or internal
accounts. The currency of the cash record is different from the bank account currency.

–

On External Accounts:

–

On Internal Accounts only one level of in House Bank is involved:

From a technical stand point, in the Cash Record table:

–

Intercompany=1 and

–

ISOBO=0 (OBOID may or may NOT exist)

Note: The cash record structure (whether there is a conversion or not) is controlled by the
Intercompany Transaction Foreign Exchange Conversion Required configuration
parameter.

•

Internal On Behalf Of Record
On a complex intercompany involving several IHBs, records at IHB level are marked as on behalf
of (OBO). In the example below, Entity EU pays 100 USD from an internal account in EUR to
ENTITY in US.

Party

Party
Bank

Party
Acct

Bank
Account
CCY

Amount

CCY

Amount
in Bank
Account

P/
R

Cpty

Cpty
Bank

ISO
BO

Ccy

1 Entity
1

IHB

EUR@
IHB

EUR

100

USD

Ext
Cpty

EXT
Bank

2 IHB

Ext
Bank

USD@
EXT
BANK

USD

100

USD

100

Ext
Cpty

EXT
Bank

This parameter controls the OBO records at IHB level: record 3 and 4.

Note: The cash record structure (conversion or not) is controlled by configuration parameter
'Intercompany Transaction Foreign Exchange Conversion Required'

WebSuite User Guide

From a technical stand point, in the Cash Record table

–

Intercompany=1 and

–

ISOBO=1 (OBOID always exists in this case)

More complex cases:
There could also be combinations of an external OBO process with two IHBs (or more) involved,
meaning that there would be records for which conversion is controlled by the Internal On Behalf
Of Record parameter and for others by the External On Behalf Of Record parameter.

3.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reviewing foreign exchange rate scenarios:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0078 Foreign Exchange Rate Scenario Mapping.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

3.3.1.2 Mapping foreign exchange rate scenarios to processes
To map a foreign exchange rate scenario to a processes:
1. Select Admin - Market Data - Foreign Exchange - FX Rate Scenario Mapping.
2. In the FX Rate Scenario Mapping List page, drill down on the process.
3. In the FX Rate Scenario Mapping Maintenance page, select the foreign exchange rate scenario in
the Rate Scenario list.
4. Click Save.

3.3.2 Reviewing market data
After you have created interest rates and foreign exchange rates in Wallstreet Suite, you can review
these market data using the following functions in CMM:

•

Review Interest Rates

•

Review FX Rates.

These functions are also beneficial for users who are not responsible for market data management
but who do require information on interest rates and foreign exchange rates as part of their work in
CMM.

3.3.3 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reviewing market data:

Archive

The file is formatted correctly and imported successfully. However, the file may still
contain content errors.

Error

The file contains a syntax error or is a duplicate.

UFO

The file’s format is not recognizable.

If CMM moves a file to the Archive or Error child folder, it changes the file’s extension to .old.
CMM displays the number of files it attempted to import, the number it imported successfully, and
the number it did not import successfully:

You can drill down on the numbers to view related records in the job log. (This is useful when you
want to determine why CMM did not import a file successfully.)

4.1.1.2 Importing forecast files using the quick method
The Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts function allows you to import forecast files by copying and pasting
their contents directly into CMM.
The files you import using the Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts function must comply with the selected
forecast import format. You create forecast import formats in the Forecast Import Formats function.

4.1.1.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for importing forecast files using the quick method:
Category

Tasks

WebSuite User Guide

Static data

Security

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Regions (see Managing regions)

•

Attribute parameters (see Managing custom parameters)

•

Payment methods (see Managing payment methods)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Business segments (see Managing business segments)

•

Instrument types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0398 Forecast Import Formats

•

FG-0399 Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
forecasts you want to import.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

4.1.1.2.2 Creating forecast import formats
To create a forecast import format:
1. Select Forecasting - Configuration - Forecast Import Formats.
2. In the Forecast Import Formats page, click New Entry.
3. In the Forecast Import Format Maintenance page, create the forecast import format.
4. Select the attributes you want to include in the forecast import format by moving them to the
Selected Attributes list. These attributes are described in “Forecast import attributes” on page71.
Blue attributes are required, and black attributes are not required.
5. Define the order of the selected attributes in the forecast import format by using
move individual attributes up or down in the Selected Attributes list.

and

6. Click Save.

4.1.1.2.3 Editing forecast import formats
To edit a forecast import format:
1. Select Forecasting - Configuration - Forecast Import Formats.
2. In the Forecast Import Formats page, drill down on the forecast import format.
3. In the Forecast Import Format Maintenance page, edit the forecast import format.
4. Select the attributes you want to include in the forecast import format by moving them to the
Selected Attributes list. These attributes are described in “Forecast import attributes” on page71
Blue attributes are required, and black attributes are not required.
5. Define the order of the selected attributes in the forecast import format by using
move individual attributes up or down in the Selected Attributes list.

and

6. Click Save.

4.1.1.2.4 Deleting forecast import formats
To delete forecast import formats:
1. Select Forecasting - Configuration - Forecast Import Formats.
2. In the Forecast Import Formats page, drill down on the forecast import format.
3. In the Forecast Import Format Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

4.1.1.2.5 Importing forecast files
To import a forecast file:
1. Select Forecasting - Capture - Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts.
2. In the Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts page, enter the forecast.
3. Do one of the following:

–

To ensure the data you entered in the Data Input Area field complies with the forecast import
format you selected in the Import Format list, click Validate.

–

To import the data you entered in the Data Input Area field, click Import.

4.1.1.2.6 Forecast import attributes
The following table presents common forecast import attributes supported by CMM:
Attribute

Description

Value

Constraints

Req. Source Map type

currency_code

The forecast’s
currency.

Currency ID

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

amount

The forecast’s
amount (in the
forecast’s
currency).

Floating point
number

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

bucket

The forecast’s time
bucket, which
indicates whether
the forecast is
short-term or
long-term.

One of the following
values:

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

A value that
indicates whether
the forecast is a
payment or a
receipt.

One of the following
values:

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

Basic

cash_flow_direct
ion

WebSuite User Guide

• day
• month

•

P if the forecast
is a payment

•

R if the forecast
is a receipt

Attribute

Description

Value

Constraints

Req. Source Map type

instrument_type

The forecast’s cash
flow type.

Instrument type ID

None

User

CMM No Map

Payment method ID

None

User

CMM No Map

Date

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

Date

None

User

CMM No Map

By assigning cash
flow types to
forecasts and other
activity in CMM,
you can categorize
this activity for a
variety of purposes.
In particular, you
can run several
reports in the
module that display
activity by cash
flow type.
Note: In CMM, a
cash flow
type is an
instrument
type with the

Status
attribute set
to Enabled.

payment_method

The forecast’s
payment method.
A forecast’s
payment method
defines how the
forecast is to be
paid (for example,
by EFT or by check)
if it becomes a
releasable
transaction.

value_date

The forecast’s
starting value date.
Note: Medium- and
long-term
forecasts can
span a range
of value
dates (for
example, a
medium-ter
m forecast
can span a
month),
while
short-term
forecasts
usually only
span one
value date.

invoice_date

The forecast’s
invoice date.

Attribute

Description

Value

Constraints

Req. Source Map type

work_flow_action

The action CMM
should take upon
importing the
forecast.

One of the following
values:

None

User

CMM No Map

Note: If you do not
specify a
value in this
column, CMM
creates a
new record
for the
forecast
upon
importing it.

• cancel

A relevant
description of or
other information
pertaining to the
forecast.

Text (2,000
characters
maximum)

None

User

CMM No Map

The forecast’s
party.

Entity ID

None

Yes

User

CMM No Map

The bank where the
forecast’s party
bank account is
held.

In-house bank ID

Must be
provided if
the party
bank
account
number is
also
provided

User

CMM No Map

The forecast’s party
bank account.

Entity bank account
number

None

System

CMM No Map

description

• edit

Party
party_id

Party bank
party_bank_id

External bank ID

Party bank account
party_bank_accou
nt_number

It is not usually
necessary to define
a party bank
account for a
forecast. However,
this attribute is
provided for
situations in which
you need to define
a party bank
account for a
short-term forecast
(or "cash
position").
Note: Do not
include
format
characters
(_, -, and so
on) in this
column.

WebSuite User Guide

Attribute

Description

Value

Constraints

Req. Source Map type

party_bank_accou
nt_currency_code

The currency of the
forecast’s party
bank account.

Currency ID

Must be
provided if
the party
bank
account
number is
also
provided

Entity ID

None

CMM
No
Map

Must be
provided if
the
counterpart
y bank
account
number is
also
provided

User

CMM No Map

User

CMM No Map

None

User

CMM No Map

Must be
provided if
the
counterpart
y bank
account
number is
also
provided

User

CMM No Map

Counterparty
cpty_id

The forecast’s
counterparty.

Counterparty ID

It is not usually
necessary to define
a counterparty for a
forecast. However,
this attribute is
provided for
situations in which
you need to define
a counterparty for a
short-term forecast
(or "cash
position").

Counterparty bank
cpty_bank_id

The ID of the bank
where the
forecast’s
counterparty bank
account is held.

In-house bank ID
External bank ID

Counterparty bank account
cpty_bank_accoun
t_number

The bank account
number of the
forecast’s
counterparty bank
account.

Entity bank account
number
Counterparty bank
account number

Note: Do not
include
format
characters
(_, -, and so
on) in this
column.

cpty_bank_accoun
t_currency_code

The ISO currency
code of the
forecast’s
counterparty bank
account.

Currency ID

Other

Attribute

Description

Value

Constraints

Req. Source Map type

customer_referen
ce_id

The forecast’s
source reference
text ID.

Text (50 characters
maximum)

None

User

CMM No Map

customer_attribu
te_0

The forecast’s
custom attributes.

Text (50 characters
maximum per field)

None

User

CMM No Map

customer_attribu
te_1

Note: You or
another user
in your
organization
can define
custom
attributes (or
"parameters"
) for
forecasts in
the
Parameter
Editor
function.

customer_attribu
te_2
customer_attribu
te_3
customer_attribu
te_4
customer_attribu
te_5
customer_attribu
te_6
customer_attribu
te_7
customer_attribu
te_8
customer_attribu
te_9

4.1.2 Entering forecasts
You can enter forecasts using the Enter Short-Term Forecasts and Enter Medium- to Long-Term
Forecasts functions. Depending on the setting of the Forecast General Item Input Method
configuration parameter, you can enter forecasts at one of two levels:

•

If the configuration parameter is set to Drilldown, you can enter forecasts at a detailed (or
"big ticket") level.

•

If the configuration parameter is set to Textbox, you can enter forecasts at an aggregated level.

In addition to entering short-term forecasts, you can initialize them from medium- and long-term
forecasts through the Enter Short-Term Forecasts function. How CMM allocates a medium- or
long-term forecast’s amounts depends on your organization’s forecast allocation model. The model
can facilitate several types of allocations, including weekly percentages that can be prorated by the
number of days in the week and daily percentages that apply to each week.

Note: CMM only allocates forecasts at the aggregated level, not the detailed level.

4.1.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering forecasts:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Forecast General Item Input Method.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Regions (see Managing regions)

•

Attribute parameters (see Managing custom parameters)

•

Payment methods (see Managing payment methods)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Business segments (see Managing business segments)

•

Instrument types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0336 Enter Short-Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0337 Enter Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the forecasts you want to enter.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following functions:
•

Enter Short-Term Forecasts

•

Enter Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts.

For more information, see
Forecasted
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring the forecast allocation model

•

Customizing the Enter… functions

•

Customizing drilldown pages

•

Customizing forecast allocation pages.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

4.1.2.2 Entering short-term forecasts
To enter a short-term forecast:
1. Select Forecasting - Capture - Enter Short-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Short Term Cash Forecasts page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

If amounts in the report display as links (because the Forecast General Item Input Method
configuration parameter is set to Drilldown):
a. Drill down on the appropriate amount.
b. In the Edit Cash Flow Forecasts page, click Add Forecast.
c.

In the resulting row, enter the short-term forecast.

d. Click Save.

–

If amounts in the report display as editable fields (because the Forecast General Item Input
Method configuration parameter is set to Textbox):
a. Enter the aggregate short-term forecast in one of the fields.
b. Click Update.

You can also enter short-term forecasts in the Enter Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function
(assuming you have security access to FG-0336 Enter Short-Term Cash Forecasts).

4.1.2.3 Entering medium- and long-term forecasts
To enter a medium- or long-term forecast:
1. Select Forecasting - Capture - Enter Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

In the resulting row, enter the medium- or long-term forecast.

d. Click Save.

–

If amounts in the report display as editable fields (because the Forecast General Item Input
Method configuration parameter is set to Textbox):
a. Enter the aggregate medium- or long-term forecast in one of the fields.
b. Click Update.

If the report displays amounts in the short-term range, you can drill down on these amounts to
enter short-term forecasts (assuming you have security access to FG-0336 Enter Short-Term
Cash Forecasts).

4.1.2.4 Entering recurring forecasts
After you’ve entered a short-, medium, or long-term forecast, you can create a set of recurring
forecasts using the short-, medium, or long-term forecast as a template. Before you can do this:

•

Set the Forecast General Item Input Method configuration parameter to Drill Down.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

•

In the Enter Short-Term Forecasts or Enter Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function, create two
formats:

–

A pivot table format

–

A list format containing the Recurrence Ref ID attribute.

Set the drilldown target of the pivot table format to the list format.

•

Create a report template that uses the pivot table format and an appropriate criteria set.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

To enter recurring forecasts:
1. Select Forecasting - Capture - Enter Short-Term Forecasts or Forecasting - Capture - Enter Medium- to Long-Term
Forecasts:

WebSuite User Guide

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Short Term Cash Forecasts or Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts page, drill down on the
appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, drill down on the appropriate amount.
4. In the Edit Cash Flow Forecasts page, click Recurrence.
5. In the Create Recurring Forecasts section of the Recurring Forecast Management page:

–

To create recurring forecasts on a daily basis:
a. Select the Daily option button.
b. Enter how frequently you want to create the recurring forecasts (in days) in the
Every…Days field.

–

To create recurring forecasts on a weekly basis:
a. Select the Weekly option button.
b. Enter how frequently you want to create the recurring forecasts (in weeks) in the
Every…Weeks field.
c.

–

Select the checkboxes of the days of the week on which you want to create recurring
forecasts.

To create recurring forecasts on a monthly basis:
a. Select the Monthly option button.
b. Do one of the following:

–

To create the recurring forecasts on a specific date of the month (for example, the
1st, the 2nd, the 3rd, and so on):
a. Select the first option button of the Monthly subsection.
b. Enter the date in the first field to the right of the first option button.
c.

–

Enter how frequently you want to create the recurring forecasts (in months) in
the second field to the right of the first option button.

To create the recurring forecasts on a day of a specific week in the month (for
example, the third Tuesday):
a. Select the second option button of the Monthly subsection.
b. Select the week in the first list to the right of the second option button.
c.

Select the day in the second list to the right of the second option button.

d. Enter how frequently you want to create the recurring forecasts (in months) in
the field to the right of the second option button.
6. In the Range of Recurrence section of the Recurring Forecast Management page:

–

To enter a specific number of recurring forecasts:
a. Select the first option button.
b. Enter the frequency in days in the For…occurrences field.

–

To enter recurring forecasts to a specific date:
a. Select the section option button.
b. Enter the date in the Until field.

7. Click Continue.

4.1.2.5 Allocating medium- and long-term forecasts to short-term forecasts
To allocate a medium- or long- term forecast to short-term forecasts:
1. Select Forecasting - Capture - Enter Short-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Short Term Cash Forecasts page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, click Initialize ST forecasts from MLT forecasts.
4. In the Allocatable Items page, select the medium- or long-term forecast’s ID checkbox.
5. Enter an appropriate date in the Allocate amounts to date field if you want to allocate the medium- or
long-term forecast to a single date.
6. Click Allocate Selected.
7. In the Preview Allocations page, click Save Allocations.

4.1.3 Entering forecasts in TRM
You can transfer a forecast (or "cash flow") entered in TRM to CMM. Before you can do this,
however, your organization’s system administrators must configure TRM and CMMas documented in
the WSS Suite System Admin Guide.

4.1.4 Canceling forecasts
If you captured a forecast in error, you can cancel it:

•

Canceling a forecast with no workflow history (in other words, a forecast that has not been
approved, released, an so on), deletes the forecast.

•

Canceling a forecast with a workflow history changes the forecast’s secondary status to Canceled
and removes it from the forecasting functionality.

Warning:

Use this functionality carefully, as you cannot undo the canceling of a forecast.

4.1.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for canceling forecasts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0390 Cancel Forecasts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank
accounts of the forecasts you want to cancel.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cancel Forecasts.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Forecasted activity
setup

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Customizing the Cancel Forecasts function.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Forecasted activity
workflow

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Capturing forecasts.

4.1.4.2 Canceling forecasts
To cancel forecasts:
1. Select Forecasting - Processing - Cancel Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cancel Forecasts page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, modify the report’s criteria to display the forecasts you want to
cancel (if necessary).
4. Do one of the following:

–

To cancel select forecasts:
a. Select the forecasts’ checkboxes.
b. Click Cancel Selected Forecasts.

–

To cancel all forecasts in the report that are cancelable:
a. Click Cancel All Forecasts.
b. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

5. In the Release Short-Term Forecasts or Release Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function,
release the forecasts you selected in step 4 to change their primary workflow statuses to
Released and their secondary workflow statuses to Canceled.
For more information on the Release Short-Term Forecasts and Release Medium- to Long-Term
Forecasts functions, see Releasing forecasts.

4.2 Approving forecasts
After a user enters a forecast, one or two other users (depending on your organization’s setup) must
review and approve it.
The following is the process when your organization requires one user to approve a forecast:
1. In the Approve Short-Term Forecasts or Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function, the
user approves the forecast.
CMM2. changes the forecast’s workflow status from Entered to Authorized.
3. The forecast is available for release.
The following is the process when your organization requires two users to approve a forecast:

1. In the Approve Short-Term Forecasts or Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function, the
first user approves the forecast.
CMM2. changes the forecast’s workflow status from Entered to Incomplete.
3. In the 2nd Approve Short-Term Forecasts or 2nd Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
function, the second user approves the forecast.
CMM4. changes the forecast’s workflow status from Incomplete to Authorized.
5. The forecast is available for release.

Note: By default, CMM requires one user to approve forecasts. However, you can change the
workflow to require two users to approve forecasts. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.

4.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for approving forecasts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0342 Approve Short-Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0343 Approve Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0361 Second Approve Short Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0362 Second Approve Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the forecasts you want to approve.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following functions:
•

Approve Short-Term Forecasts

•

Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts

•

2nd Approve Short-Term Forecasts

•

2nd Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts.

For more information, see
Forecasted
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring forecast workflow

•

Customizing the Approve… functions

•

Customizing the 2nd Approve… functions

•

Customizing drilldown pages.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Forecasted
activity
workflow

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Capturing forecasts.

4.2.2 Approving short-term forecasts
To approve a short-term forecast:

WebSuite User Guide

1. Select Forecasting - Processing - Approve Short-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Short Term Cash Forecast Approval page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

To approve an aggregate short-term forecast:
a. Select the aggregate short-term forecast’s checkbox.
b. Click Approve Selected.

–

To approve a short-term forecast:
a. Drill down on the appropriate aggregate short-term forecast.
b. In the Approve Cash Flow Forecasts page, select Approve in the short-term forecast’s
Action list.
c.

Enter any appropriate comments in the short-term forecast’s Workflow Comments field.

d. Click Approve Selected.

4.2.3 Approving medium- and long-term forecasts
To approve a medium- or long-term forecast:
1. Select Forecasting - Processing - Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Medium-Long Term Cash Forecast Approval page, drill down on the appropriate report
template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

To approve an aggregate medium- or long-term forecast:
a. Select the aggregate medium- or long-term forecast’s checkbox.
b. Click Approve Selected.

–

To approve a medium- or long-term forecast:
a. Drill down on the appropriate aggregate medium- or long-term forecast.
b. In the Approve Cash Flow Forecasts page, select Approve in the medium- or long-term
forecast’s Action list.
c.

Enter any appropriate comments in the medium- or long-term forecast’s Workflow Comments
field.

d. Click Approve Selected.

4.2.4 Completing the second approval of forecasts
If your organization requires two approvals of forecasts, you can complete second approvals using
the 2nd Approve Short-Term Forecasts and 2nd Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
functions. These functions are similar to the Approve Short-Term Forecasts and Approve Medium- to
Long-Term Forecasts functions, in structure and features.

4.3 Releasing forecasts
When a forecast is fully approved (in other words its workflow status is Authorized), you can release
it through the Release Short-Term Forecasts or Release Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts function.
Released forecasts are available for exposure management and hedge accounting in TRM. Once
released, a forecast can no longer be edited in CMM. However, a new version of the forecast is
created, which you can edit, re-approve, and re-release.

Note: You can modify CMM so that the creation of the new version of the forecast is completed
separately in the Re-Open Short-Term Forecasts or Re-Open Medium- to Long-Term
Forecasts function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

4.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for releasing forecasts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0344 Release Short Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0345 Release Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0365 Re-open Short Term Cash Forecasts

•

FG-0366 Re-open Medium-Long Term Cash Forecasts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the forecasts you want to approve.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following functions:
•

Release Short-Term Forecasts

•

Release Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts

•

Re-Open Short-Term Forecasts

•

Re-Open Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts.

For more information, see
Forecasted
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring forecast workflow

•

Customizing the Release… functions

•

Customizing the Re-Open… functions

•

Customizing drilldown pages.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Forecasted
activity
workflow

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Capturing forecasts

•

Approving forecasts.

4.3.2 Releasing short-term forecasts
To release a short-term forecast:
1. Select Forecasting - Processing - Re-Open Short-Term Forecasts:

WebSuite User Guide

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Short Term Cash Forecast Release page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

To release an aggregate short-term forecast:
a. Select the aggregate short-term forecast’s checkbox.
b. Click Release Selected.

–

To release a short-term forecast:
a. Drill down on the appropriate aggregate short-term forecast.
b. In the Cash Forecast Details page, enter any appropriate comments in the short-term
forecast’s Workflow Comments field.
c.

Click Release Selected.

4.3.3 Releasing medium- and long-term forecasts
To release a medium- or long-term forecast:
1. Select Forecasting - Processing - Re-Open Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Medium-Long Term Cash Forecast Release page, drill down on the appropriate report
template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

To release an aggregate medium- or long-term forecast:
a. Select the aggregate medium- or long-term forecast’s checkbox.
b. Click Release Selected.

–

To release a medium- or long-term forecast:
a. Drill down on the appropriate aggregate medium- or long-term forecast.
b. In the Cash Forecast Details page, enter any appropriate comments in the medium- or
long-term forecast’s Workflow Comments field.
c.

Click Release Selected.

4.4 Analyzing forecasts
You can analyze forecasts by running the following report:

•

Forecast.

4.4.1 Running the Forecast report
Like the forecasted activity workflow functions, the Forecast report is based on the flexible reporting
framework. Therefore, you can create custom report templates containing only the necessary
attributes and criteria in a format of your choosing.

You can include expected, instructed, and bank-reported activity in addition to forecasted activity in
the Forecast report so that you can compare the different types of activity side-by-side for cash
forecasting and positioning purposes.

4.4.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering forecasts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0013 Custom Forecast Reports.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the activity you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Forecast Reports.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

4.4.1.2 Running the Forecast report
To run the Forecast report:
1. Select Reporting - Forecasting - Forecast Reports:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Forecast Reporting page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

WebSuite User Guide

Chapter 5

Managing expected and instructed
activity

Expected activity is activity that is anticipated to occur and can be initiated by either party in a
transaction. Instructed activity, on the other hand, is activity that is ultimately sent to a bank as an
instruction and is initiated by an entity in your organization. In CMM, you use the same set of
functionality to capture and process expected activity and instructed activity. A single unit of this
activity is called a transaction.

5.1 Capturing transactions
You can capture transactions in CMM by importing them from accounts payable and receivable
systems or entering them using one of the following functions:

•

Enter Single Transaction

•

Enter Repetitive Transactions

•

Enter Intercompany Payment

•

Enter Deposits.

If your organization is using CMM as part of Wallstreet Suite, you can also enter transactions in TRM
and process them in CMM.

5.1.1 Importing accounts payable and direct debit files
Importing an accounts payable or direct debit file brings the file’s transactions into CMM.
Undoing an accounts payable or direct debit file import deletes the file from CMM. You can unimport
an accounts payable or direct debit file if its transactions are New or Incomplete. If a transaction has
been authorized, released, or reconciled, you cannot unimport its file. You must first unauthorize,
unrelease, or unreconcile the transaction.

5.1.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for importing accounts payable and direct debit files:
Category

Tasks

WebSuite User Guide

Static data

Interfaces

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Payment methods (see Managing payment methods)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Instrument types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0203 Import Transaction Files

•

FG-0203.01 Browse Transaction Files

•

FG-0203.02 Edit Transaction Files

•

FG-0204 Undo Transaction File Imports

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
transactions you want to import.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

5.1.1.2 Importing accounts payable and direct debit files
You can import accounts payable and direct debit files on a regular basis by scheduling the
Transaction File Import task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite
System Admin Guide.

You can also import accounts payable and direct debit files on a one-time basis using the Import
Transaction Files function:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Import Transaction Files.
2. In the Accounts Payable/Direct Debit File Import page:

–

To import accounts payable files for all interchanges, select AP File Import in the File Import
Type list.

–

To import direct debit files for all interchanges, select Direct Debit in the File Import Type list.

–

To import files for a specific interchange, select the interchange in the Interchange Name list.

3. Do one of the following:

–

If the files are in the location designated by the appropriate interchange or the Default File
Import Directory configuration parameter, click Import Files.

–

If the files are in another location:
a. Click Upload Files….
b. In the Upload AP File Import Files or Upload Direct Debit Import Files page, click Find Files.
c.

In the resulting dialog, navigate to and select the first file you want to import.

d. Click Open.
e. Repeat steps b to d for each file you want to import.
f.

In the Upload AP File Import Files or Upload Direct Debit Import Files page, select the
location to which you want to upload the file in the Upload to Location list.

g. Do one of the following:

–

To upload the selected files to the selected location, click Upload Selected File(s). (You can
later import the files using the Accounts Payable/Direct Debit File Import page or the
Task Scheduler function.)

–

To import the selected files, click Import Selected File(s).

If you have access to FG-0203.01 Browse Transaction Files or FG-0203.02 Edit Transaction Files,
click Browse Files in the Accounts Payable/Direct Debit File Import page before import to do the
following:

•

View accounts payable or direct debit files if you have access to FG-0203.01 Browse Transaction
Files

•

Edit accounts payable or direct debit files if you have access to FG-0203.02 Edit Transaction
Files.

After importing accounts payable or direct debit files, CMM appends the files’ names with the date
and time of import and moves the files from their original location to one of the following child
folders:
Child folder

Reason

Archive

The file is formatted correctly and imported successfully. However, the file may still
contain content errors.

Error

The file contains a syntax error or is a duplicate.

UFO

The file’s format is not recognizable.

If CMM moves a file to the Archive or Error child folder, it changes the file’s extension to .old.

WebSuite User Guide

Note: If there are more than 200 transactions in a file with validation, routing, duplicate record,

or other problems, CMM changes the file’s import status from load error to file error. CMM
also removes any successfully imported transactions from the file.

CMM displays the number of files it attempted to import, the number it imported successfully, and
the number it did not import successfully:

You can drill down on the numbers to view related records in the job log. (This is useful when you
want to determine why CMM did not import a file successfully.)

5.1.1.3 Undoing accounts payable and direct debit file imports
To undo an accounts payable or direct debit file import:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Undo Transaction File Imports.
2. In the Undo Transaction Imports - Criteria Selection page:

–

To undo an accounts payable file import, select AP File Import in the Transaction Type list.

–

To undo a direct debit file import, select Direct Debits in the Transaction Type list.

3. Click Continue.
4. In the Accounts Payable Imports - Criteria Selection or Direct Debit Imports - Criteria Selection
page, enter search criteria.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Accounts Payable Imports Report or Direct Debit Imports Report page, click Undo in the
accounts payable or direct debit file import’s row.
7. In the Undo Accounts Payable Import Confirmation or Undo Direct Debits Import Confirmation
page, click Undo Above Transaction Import.

5.1.1.4 Undoing individual transactions in imports
To undo individual transactions in an import:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Undo Transaction File Imports.
2. In the Undo Transaction Imports - Criteria Selection page:

–

To undo transactions in an accounts payable file import, select AP File Import in the
Transaction Type list.

–

To undo transactions in a direct debit file import, select Direct Debits in the Transaction Type
list.

3. Click Continue.
4. In the Accounts Payable Imports - Criteria Selection or Direct Debit Imports - Criteria Selection
page, enter search criteria.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Accounts Payable Imports Report or Direct Debit Imports Report page, click Details in the
accounts payable or direct debit file import’s row.
7. In the Accounts Payable Import Details or Direct Debit Import Details page, select the
transactions’ Undo checkboxes.
8. Click Undo.

5.1.2 Entering transactions
Enter Single Transaction and Enter Repetitive Transactions are the main functions you can use to
enter transactions in CMM.
The Enter Single Transaction function allows you to enter single payments or receipts. In this
function, you can either enter a transaction from scratch or use a template. In addition, this function
allows you to use an existing counterparty or create a new one-off counterparty.
The Enter Repetitive Transactions function allows you to enter multiple transactions in a single
screen. You can assign a template or repetitive code to each transaction to define its details.

5.1.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering transactions:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Payment methods (see Managing payment methods)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Instrument types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0017 Enter Deposits

•

FG-0070 Enter Repetitive Transactions

•

FG-0188 Single Transaction Entry

•

FG-0320 Enter Intercompany Payment

•

TMP-0002 Single Transaction Entry - Complete Access.

Note: If you have access to FG-0188 Single Transaction Entry but not TMP-0002 Single
Transaction Entry - Complete Access, you can only create a transaction based on an
existing template.
In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
transactions you want to enter.
For more information, see
Expected and
instructed
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring transaction templates and repetitive codes.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

5.1.2.2 Entering basic single transactions
To enter a basic single transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Enter Single Transaction.
2. In the Single Transaction Entry page, enter the transaction.

WebSuite User Guide

You can use the Entity Bank Account Group and Counterparty Bank Account Group drop-downs to filter the
available bank accounts for Entity and counterparty bank accounts.
3. Do the following:

–

To add remittance details to the transaction:
a. Display the Remittance Details section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each remittance detail you want to enter.

–

To assign additional attributes to the transaction:
a. Display the Additional Attributes section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each additional attribute you want to enter.
By default, a single cash record can have up to 10 custom attributes. These attributes are
defined in the CASHRECORDCONTENTTYPE table, and can be edited. For more information, see
the WebSuite System Admin Guide and search for Cash record Additional Attributes.

Note: There is no restriction on the number of attributes configured but only the first 20 can be
passed to accounting entries in ACM.

–

To assign an intermediary or correspondent to the transaction:
a. Display the Intermediary/Correspondent section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
4. Click Save.
The resulting confirmation message includes a table listing the cash records CMM created when
you saved the transaction:

You can drill down on cash records in the table to view their details.

5.1.2.3 Entering one-off single transactions
To enter a one-off single transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Enter Single Transaction.
2. In the Single Transaction Entry page, select One Off Payment in the Counterparty list.

WebSuite User Guide

When you select One Off Payment in the Counterparty list, a new set of controls displays in the
Counterparty and Counterparty Bank Account sections:

3. In the Counterparty and Counterparty Bank Account sections of the Single Transaction Entry
page, enter a one-off counterparty and counterparty bank account for the transaction.
4. In the remaining sections of the Single Transaction Entry page, enter the transaction.
5. Do the following:

–

To add remittance details to the transaction:
a. Display the Remittance Details section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each remittance detail you want to enter.

–

To assign additional attributes to the transaction:
a. Display the Additional Attributes section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each additional attribute you want to enter.

–

To assign an intermediary or correspondent to the transaction:
a. Display the Intermediary/Correspondent section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
6. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

The resulting confirmation message includes a table listing the cash records CMM created when
you saved the transaction:

You can drill down on cash records in the table to view their details.

5.1.2.4 Entering template-based single transactions
To enter a template-based single transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Enter Single Transaction.
2. In the Single Transaction Entry page, select the template you want to apply to the transaction in
the Template Name list.
3. Enter the transaction.
The controls that you can modify depend on the type of template you selected in step 2:

–

Default templates allow you to modify controls with default values defined by the templates.

–

Limited templates do not allow you to modify controls with default values defined by the
templates.

–

Repetitive templates only allow you to modify the Amount, Value Date, and Transaction Date fields.

4. Do the following:

–

To add remittance details to the transaction:
a. Display the Remittance Details section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each remittance detail you want to enter.

–

To assign additional attributes to the transaction:
a. Display the Additional Attributes section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
c.

Click Add Line.

d. Repeat steps b to c for each additional attribute you want to enter.

–

To assign an intermediary or correspondent to the transaction:
a. Display the Intermediary/Correspondent section’s controls.

b. Enter data.
5. Click Save.
The resulting confirmation message includes a table listing the cash records CMM created when
you saved the transaction:

You can drill down on cash records in the table to view their details.

WebSuite User Guide

5.1.2.5 Entering repetitive transactions
To enter a repetitive transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Capture - Enter Repetitive Transactions.
2. In the Repetitive Transaction Entry - Criteria Selection page, enter the transaction’s header data.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Repetitive Transaction Entry page, enter the transaction’s detail data.
To view a transaction’s template, click the transaction’s View Template link.
5. Specify the transaction’s holiday schedule using the Include Weekends and Holidays and Use bank holiday
schedule for controls.
6. Click Generate Totals.
7. Click Save Transactions.

5.1.2.6 Using other functions
You can enter specific types of transactions using functions other than Enter Single Transaction and
Enter Repetitive Transactions:
Function

Purpose

Enter Intercompany Payment

Enter an intercompany payment and its
remittance details in a single screen.

Enter Deposits

Enter deposits for a defined bank, bank
account, and value date in a single screen.

5.1.3 Entering transactions in TRM
You can import transactions from TRM to CMM. Before you can do this, however, your organization’s
system administrators must configure TRM and CMM as documented in the WSS Suite System
Admin Guide.

5.2 Editing and deleting transactions
After capturing a transaction, you can edit it. The function you use to edit a transaction depends on
how you captured the transaction:
To edit a transaction…

Use…

Entered in the Enter Single Transaction function.

The Edit Transactions function.

Entered in the Enter Repetitive Transactions function.

The Edit Transactions function.

Entered in the Enter Intercompany Payment function.

The Edit Intercompany Payment function.

Entered in the Enter Deposits function.

The Enter Deposits function.

Imported from an accounts payable or receivable
system.

The Edit Transactions function.

Entered in TRM and transferred to CMM.

The Edit Transactions function.

The Edit Transactions function is secured by attribute. Therefore, if you are editing transactions in
this function, you can only modify the attributes to which you have security access.
If you have captured a transaction in error and the transaction is not yet authorized, you can delete
it in the Edit Transactions function. Deleting a transaction removes its cash records from the CMM
database.

5.2.1 Prerequisites
There are two levels of controls on Transaction Edition.
1. Access to the edit function:
You need access to the following functions:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0036 Edit Transactions

•

FG-0232 Edit Intercompany Payment.

By assigning the subfunctions of FG-0036 Edit Transactions to different profiles, you can
restrict access to editing of manual transactions, accounts payable and receivable
transactions, and direct debit transactions.
For a user to have access to view and edit manual transactions, he or she needs access to
FG-0036.01 Edit Manual Transactions. By default, CMM assigns FG-0036.01 Edit Manual
Transactions to any function security profile that has FG-0036 Edit Transactions.
You need to assign the following functions to a user’s profiles before he or she can edit
transactions imported from accounts payable, accounts receivable, direct debit, or letter of
credit files:
•

FG-0036.02 Edit AP Transactions

•

FG-0036.03 Edit DD Transactions

•

FG-0036.04 Edit AR Transactions.

The ability to edit specific attributes for accounts payable and direct debit transactions has
also been introduced through security by attribute profiles.
In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the transactions you want to edit and delete. This is defined in Security Center which is
described in the Wallstreet Suite System Admin Guide.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Expected and
instructed
activity
workflow

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Capturing transactions.

2. Access to the individual attributes of the cash record:
You can control, at two levels, what attributes of the records are editable or not editable:

–

Default Level per State (Modes)
Modes allow you to define the default configuration of what attributes are editable per state.
For example, you can block the editing of Party Account in all states regardless of other

WebSuite User Guide

setup for the users. This allows you to create a certain setup of some default configuration
parameters. For example, once fully authorized, only the comment field is editable.
You can set up a mode where everything is editable except for some exceptions, or nothing
is editable except for some exceptions. Details of mode configuration can be found in the
Managing security chapter of the WebSuite System Administration Guide.

Note: Modes can control field editing for authorizable states, for state Authorized and for NA

(receipts). The behavior is hard coded for RELEASED and reconciled cash records and only
comment-related fields are editable (Bank Instruction, Counterparty Message, Comment)

–

Per user and Originating code (Manual, AP, AR, DD)
You can configure the Security by Attributes profile to control what users can edit. You can
do this in the security and per cash record originating code: WS-ATTRIBUTE-AR,
WS-ATTRIBUTE-DD, WS-ATTRIBUTE-AP.

The following example assumes that the user has access to the edit function:
To edit an attribute on a cashrecord that was imported from an AP file and is in NEW state:

–

The field must be defined as editable in NEW state (Mode set up)

–

The user needs access to the corresponding Security by Attributes for AP records.

Note: For cash records entered using a template, the fields that are locked at the template level

cannot be edited in the cash record, regardless of the mode and the attribute profile setup.

5.2.2 Editing transactions
For complex payments, payments involving several cash records, only the main cash record is
editable. Edited cash records are flagged as edited. It is possible to use this as a condition in the
cash record authorization workflow through an XML agent.
To edit a transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Transactions List page, drill down on the transaction.
5. In the Edit Transaction page, edit the transaction.
6. Click Save.

5.2.3 Deleting transactions
To delete a transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Edit Transactions.
2. In the Edit Transactions - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Transactions List page, drill down on the transaction.
5. In the Edit Transaction page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

100

5.3 Authorizing transactions
The number of Authorization for a Cash record depends on the Payment Flow set up (see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide).
Transactions that a user may authorize is controlled by Transaction Processing rules.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Before authorizing payments, you can review them in the Review Payment Authorization function to
ensure they are accurate and correct.
If you authorize a transaction in error, you can unauthorize it using the Undo Transaction
Authorization function. When you unauthorize a transaction, its status changes from Authorized to
its last previous status (either New or Incomplete). In addition, the transaction is no longer available
for release and CMM reverses any related accounting.

5.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for authorizing transactions:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0062 Browse Payments Requiring Authorization

•

FG-0123 Transaction Authorization Report

•

FG-0210 Undo Transaction Authorization.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the transactions you want to authorize.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Authorize Transactions.

For more information, see
Expected and
instructed activity
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring transaction authorization rules

•

Configuring transaction processing rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Expected and
instructed activity
workflow

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Capturing transactions.

5.3.2 Reviewing payments before authorization
To review payments before authorization:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Review Payment Authorization.
2. In the Browse Payments Requiring Authorization - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.

WebSuite User Guide

101

5.3.3 Authorizing transactions
To authorize a transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Authorize Transactions.

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Transaction Authorization page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, select the transaction’s checkbox.
4. Click Authorize Selected Transactions.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.
If the Transaction Authorization Logging Enabled configuration parameter is set to True, CMM
tracks the following processes in the job log:

–

Payment authorization

–

Confirmation message generation

–

Remittance advice generation

–

Bank balance update.

If there are any errors, the logs note them accordingly.
The logs’ initial statuses are Started and then Complete. If any of the selected transactions fail
during authorization, the logs’ statuses are Errors. Drilling down displays a list of the failed
transactions with detailed descriptions as to why they failed.

5.3.4 Undoing transaction authorizations
To undo a transaction authorization:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Undo Transaction Authorization.
2. In the Undo Transaction Authorization - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Authorized Payments Report or Authorized Direct Debits Report page, select the
transaction authorization’s checkbox.
5. Click Unauthorize Selected Transactions.

5.4 Releasing transactions
After fully authorizing a transaction, you can release it to a bank.
Before releasing a payment, you can review it in the Review Unreleased Payments function to
ensure it is accurate and correct.
Releasing a receipt involves sending a pre-advice to a receiving bank to notify it of incoming funds.
This allows the bank’s treasury to optimize its aggregate funding requirements, maximizing its
returns.

102

When you release a transaction, CMM does the following:

•

Changes the transaction’s status from Authorized to Releasing

•

Creates a payment file or message

•

Places the payment file or message in a folder or queue for release to the bank

•

Updates the database.

When you first release a transaction, CMM stores the generated file or message in a location hidden
from other processes until all work on the related database records is completed. CMM then makes
the file or message available to the other processes. This ensures the other processes do not
negatively impact the release process.
If the database update is successful, CMM changes the transaction’s status from Releasing to
Released. However, if the database update is not successful, CMM does not change the
transaction’s status. You can then change the transaction’s status to Released or undo the
transaction release.

Note: This ensures you do not accidentally re-release a transaction if its message was placed in a
queue but the database was not updated. (It is not possible to rerelease transactions in
Releasing status.)

If you release a transaction in error, you can unrelease it using the Undo Transaction Releases
function. When you undo a release, the status of the related cash records changes from Released to
Authorized. However, accounting is not reversed. You must reverse the accounting manually.

Note: You cannot unrelease transactions that have been reconciled.

5.4.1 Aggregating payments at release
One of the most common forms of aggregation is when organizations aggregate a group of payment
transactions that are to be sent to a bank by batching those transactions together. This allows
internal operational processes to generate single transactions, and also provides the ability to group
them into a single batch before sending them to the bank, thus reducing costs. When setting up an
interchange in WebSuite to manage the communications with a bank for payments, users can select

WebSuite User Guide

103

an aggregation method. This aggregates payments into a block for release to the bank in various
ways according to the aggregation method chosen. WebSuite provides various types of aggregation:
Community Aggregation

Multi Credit Aggregation

Single Credit Aggregation

104

When the release payments functionality is run, payments that can be aggregated
together are joined and released as a single payment. The payments are grouped
by:
•

Payor Account

•

Currency

•

Payment Method

•

Value Date

•

Priority

•

Cross Border Status.

When the release payments functionality is run, payments that can be aggregated
together are joined and released as a single payment on the organization’s
statement. They appear as aggregate values in the release list. However, the
credit or CPTY accounts are paid in non-aggregate payments (one to many) along
with any detailed remittance information. The payments are grouped by:
•

Originator

•

Payor Account

•

Currency

•

Payment Method

•

Value Date

•

Priority

•

Cross Border Status.

This creates a single payment from a group of similar payments, and creates a
single corresponding credit transaction for these payments. This can be used to
combine payments for a single party, or for a bulk payment that will then use a
bank dispersement mechanism. Payments are grouped for the same:
•

Originator

•

Payor Account

•

Cpty Account

•

Txn Currency

•

Pay Method

•

Value Date

•

Priority.

Netting Aggregation

This provides the ability to net intercompany payments and receipts at payment
release. The payments are grouped by:
•

Entity

•

Counterparty

•

Value date

•

Entity bank

•

Entity bank account

•

Counterparty bank

•

Counterparty bank account

•

Payment method.

When this aggregation is activated at payment release, it applies only to
inter-company activity (i.e. within your organization) on external bank accounts.
If the net is a receipt, CMM presents all associated transactions as non-releasable,
with the message that the release must be initiated from the counterparty side.
In the case of a net zero transaction, the system creates a zero aggregate
payment and links all child transactions and reconciles them.
Note: When a release is made, and there are external payments to be handled as
well, the system uses a secondary aggregation type that corresponds to the
Interchange Format Category (SWIFT, EDIFACT, etc.) that is selected for
the interchange. By default, this aggregation type is Single Credit
Aggregation.
No Aggregation

The release of payments occurs without any aggregation.

XML Aggregation

This aggregation is template-driven, allowing customers to create their own
aggregation rules in XML. The default is "no aggregation".
In releasing transactions, the release criteria provides the user with the ability to
select a specific interchange. The selection of an interchange with an aggregation
type causes the transactions available for release to be combined on the release
screen. Drilling into the release transaction allows users to see the details of the
aggregate record.
In general, any aggregate payment released as such in CMM can be undone as a
component by drilling down into the aggregate payment.
Another method for achieving aggregation is to build the aggregation within the
XML specification itself, so that when a payment is released the XML decides on
the outgoing aggregation automatically.

Once transactions have been authorized, the aggregation type should apply at release if the
appropriate interchange has been selected.
Aggregated transactions are then processed like standard payments. The aggregated cash record is
created, and all the child transactions are reconciled to the parent transaction. The aggregated
transaction is available for reconciliation to the bank statement. When reconciled at bank statement,
the aggregate is bank reconciled and cash reconciled.
Transaction reporting provides drilldown to show the individual components of the aggregated
amount.

5.4.2 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for releasing transactions:
Category

WebSuite User Guide

Tasks

105

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0064 Release Payments

•

FG-0129 Browse Unreleased Payments

•

FG-0161 Release Receipts

•

FG-0209 Undo Transaction Releases.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the transactions you want to release.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Interfaces

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the WebSuite Cash Management Connectivity Guide.
Expected and
instructed
activity setup

Ensure the following task has been completed:

Expected and
instructed
activity workflow

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:

•

Capturing pre-advice reporting limits.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

•

Capturing transactions

•

Authorizing transactions.

5.4.3 Reviewing payments before release
To review payments before release:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Review Unreleased Payments.
2. In the Unreleased Payments - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.

5.4.4 Releasing payments
To release a payment:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Release Payments.
2. In the Release Payments - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Release Payments page, select the payment’s checkbox.
5. Click Release Selected Payments.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.
If the Payment Error Messages configuration parameter is set to True, you can click
Review Payment Release Errors in the resulting page to view any errors and repair the associated static
data.

Note: If you are using ESIAdapter to connect to SWIFT (FileAct), syntax checking of incoming

and outgoing MX messages is performed. Should an outgoing payment fail the check, it will
not be released to SWIFT. In this situation, the system shows an error in the Job Log (Log
Status = Transport Rejected with details). See the WebSuite Cash Management
Connectivity Guide for additional details and search for: ISO20022.

106

5.4.5 Releasing receipts
To release a receipt:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Release Receipts.
2. In the Release Receipts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Receipt Release Confirmation page, select the receipt’s checkbox.
5. Click Confirm.

5.4.6 Undoing transaction releases
To undo a transaction release:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Undo Transaction Releases.
2. In the Undo Transaction Releases - Criteria Selection page, select Payments, Direct Debits,
Letters of Credit, or Positive Pay in the Transaction Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Payment Releases - Criteria Selection, Direct Debit Releases - Criteria Selection, Letter of
Credit Releases - Criteria Selection, or Positive Pay Releases - Criteria Selection page, enter
search criteria.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Payment Releases Report, Direct Debit Releases Report, Letter of Credit Releases Report,
or Positive Pay Releases Report page, click Undo in the transaction release’s row.
7. In the Undo Payment Release Confirmation, Undo Direct Debit Release, Undo Letter of Credit
Release, or Undo Positive Pay Release page, click Undo Above Transaction Release.

5.4.7 Undoing individual transactions in releases
To undo individual transactions in a release:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Undo Transaction Releases.
2. In the Undo Transaction Releases - Criteria Selection page, select Payments, Direct Debits,
Letters of Credit, or Positive Pay in the Transaction Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Payment Releases - Criteria Selection, Direct Debit Releases - Criteria Selection, Letter of
Credit Releases - Criteria Selection, or Positive Pay Releases - Criteria Selection page, enter
search criteria.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Payment Releases Report, Direct Debit Releases Report, Letter of Credit Releases Report,
or Positive Pay Releases Report page, click Details in the transaction release’s row.
7. In the Payment Release Details, Direct Debit Release Details, Letters of Credit Release Details,
or Positive Pay Release Details page, select the transactions’ checkboxes.
8. Click Undo.

WebSuite User Guide

107

5.4.8 Changing transactions from Releasing status to Released status
To change transactions from Releasing status to Released status:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Undo Transaction Releases.
2. In the Undo Transaction Releases - Criteria Selection page, select Payments, Direct Debits,
Letters of Credit, or Positive Pay in the Transaction Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Payment Releases - Criteria Selection, Direct Debit Releases - Criteria Selection, Letter of
Credit Releases - Criteria Selection, or Positive Pay Releases - Criteria Selection page, enter
search criteria.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Payment Releases Report, Direct Debit Releases Report, Letter of Credit Releases Report,
or Positive Pay Releases Report page, click Details in the transaction release’s row.
7. In the Payment Release Details, Direct Debit Release Details, Letters of Credit Release Details,
or Positive Pay Release Details page, click Move to Released.

5.5 Managing bank messages
When a bank receives transactions from CMM, it performs its own validation at two levels:

•

Against the file or message

•

Against the individual transactions.

If the bank rejects the file or message for security or initial content reasons, the bank can send a
failure message back to CMM. When CMM imports the failure message, it highlights errors for your
attention and further action.
If the bank rejects an individual transaction in the file or message, the bank can send an error
message that lists the transaction and the reason for failure. CMM then imports the error message,
and you can either correct the transaction or create a replacement transaction.
Some banks can also provide positive acknowledgements at both the file and transaction levels.
CMM can import these acknowledgements, and you can view them to ensure the payments have
been received and passed the bank’s initial validations.

5.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing bank messages:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0207 Import Bank Message Files.

For more information, see
Interfaces

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.

108

Expected and
instructed activity
workflow

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Releasing transactions.

5.5.2 Importing bank messages
You can import bank messages on a regular basis by scheduling the Bank Messages Import task in
the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
You can also import bank messages on a one-time basis using the Import Bank Message Files
function:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Import Bank Message Files.
2. Click Import Files.
After importing bank messages, CMM appends the files’ names with the date and time of import and
moves the files from their original location to one of the following child folders:
Child folder

Reason

Archive

The file is formatted correctly and imported successfully. However, the file may still
contain content errors.

Error

The file contains a syntax error or is a duplicate.

UFO

The file’s format is not recognizable.

You can drill down on the numbers to view related records in the job log. (This is useful when you
want to determine why CMM did not import a file successfully.)

5.6 Managing free format messages
CMM

SWIFT MT199 and MT999 are message formats that can be used by to send information between
corporations and financial institutions for which there is no other SWIFT message type.
CMM supports SWIFT MT199 and MT999 formats for the following situations:

•

Sending free format messages from a corporation to a financial institution and receiving free
format messages from a financial institution to a corporation. One of the main applications of
this situation is using the SWIFT MT199 and MT999 formats in place of the SWIFT MT195 and
MT196 formats for replying to inquiries.

•

Receiving a SWIFT MT199 message sent from a financial institution as a status message to
report reasons for a transaction instruction not being executed or to reject a transaction. (This
situation will be implemented in a later release of CMM.)

WebSuite User Guide

109

The Import Free Format Message File and Free Format Messaging functions allow you to import,
enter, and manage free format messages in the SWIFT MT199 and MT999 formats.

5.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing free format messages:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0503 Free Format Messaging

•

FG-0504 Import Free Format Message File.

For more information, see
Interfaces

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Free Format Messaging.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

5.6.2 Importing free format messages
You can import free format messages on a regular basis by scheduling the appropriate task in the
Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
You can also import free format messages on a one-time basis using the Import Free Format
Message File function:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Bank Interfacing - Import Free Format Message File.
2. Click Import Free Format Message Files.

5.6.2.1 Entering free format messages
To enter a free format message:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Bank Interfacing - Free Format Messaging:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Free Format Messaging page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Click New.
4. In the Free Format Message Details page, enter the free format message:
5. Do one of the following:

110

–

To save the free format message and send it, click Send.

–

To save the free format message but not send it, click Save.

5.6.2.2 Editing free format messages
To edit a free format message:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Bank Interfacing - Free Format Messaging:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Free Format Messaging page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Drill down on the free format message.
4. In the Free Format Message Details page, edit the free format message:
5. Do one of the following:

–

To save the free format message and send it, click Send.

–

To save the free format message but not send it, click Save.

5.6.2.3 Deleting free format messages
To delete a free format message:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Bank Interfacing - Free Format Messaging:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Free Format Messaging page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Drill down on the free format message.
4. In the Free Format Message Details page, click Delete.
You can only delete manually entered free format messages.

5.6.2.4 Sending and removing free format messages
To send or remove free format messages:
1. Select Admin - Utilities - Bank Interfacing - Free Format Messaging:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Free Format Messaging page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Select the messages’ checkboxes.
4. Do one of the following:

–

To send the selected free format messages, click Send Selected Message(s).

–

To remove the selected free format messages, click Remove Selected Message(s).

5. Click Refresh.

5.7 Rejecting transactions
On occasion, you may want to reject a transaction if it contains errors. The Reject Transactions
function allows you to do this at any point in the transaction workflow prior to reconciliation. After
you reconcile a transaction, you can no longer reject it.

WebSuite User Guide

111

The Undo Transaction Rejection function allows you to undo a transaction rejection in case you or
another user made the rejection in error. This function restores the transaction to its original state
before rejection.

5.7.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for rejecting transactions:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0007 Undo Transaction Rejection

•

FG-0216 Payment Rejection.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
transactions you want to release.
For more information, see
Interfaces

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.

5.7.2 Rejecting transactions
To reject a transaction:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Reject Transactions.
2. In the Transaction Rejection - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Transaction Rejection page, select the transaction’s Reject checkbox:
If you are rejecting more than one transaction:

–

If the reason for rejection applies to all the transactions, enter the reason in the
Default Rejected Reason field.

–

If the reason for rejection differs for the transactions, enter the reasons in each transaction’s
Reason field.

If a transaction requires an interchange message for rejection, select its Generate Neg Confirmation
checkbox. The negative confirmation message is saved to a designated folder and sent to the
financial institution during the next transfer of information. (To generate a negative confirmation
message, you must have set up an interchange for the rejection process. For more information,
see the CMM Interfaces Guide.)
5. Click Reject Transaction(s).
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

112

5.7.3 Undoing transaction rejections
To undo a transaction rejection:
1. Select Payment Factory - Processing - Undo Transaction Rejection.
2. In the Undo Transaction Rejection - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Undo Transaction Rejection page, select the transaction rejection’s Undo checkbox.
5. Click Undo Rejected Transaction(s).
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

5.8 Analyzing transactions
You can analyze transactions by running the following reports:

•

Cash Transaction

•

Transaction Analysis

•

Remittance Details.

5.8.1 Running the Cash Transaction report
The Cash Transaction report presents transactions that are imported from an external system, such
as an accounts payable or receivable system. This function also presents manually entered
corporate transactions and settled financial transactions (from TRM).
You can generate Cash Transaction reports after accounts payable or receivable import or after
reconciliation, as it is helpful in identifying open or unreconciled transactions. All staff and
management with appropriate security access can run it. Use this report in conjunction with your
organization’s bank statement and CMM’s forecast reports to build an accurate and comprehensive
understanding of your organization’s cash position.
Authorized local organization or subsidiary staff can view and analyze cash activity pertaining to
their entity. Authorized treasury staff and management have a global view and can also analyze
cash activity for a specific entity or all entities at once.
Information in this function reflects up-to-the-minute status of cash activity.

5.8.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Cash Transaction report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0067 Cash Transaction Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

113

Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cash Transaction Report.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

5.8.1.2 Running the Cash Transaction report
To run the Cash Transaction report:
1. Select Reporting - Payment Factory - Cash Transaction Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Transaction Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

5.8.2 Running the Remittance Details report
The Remittance Details report presents remittance details that match your criteria.

5.8.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Remittance Details report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0166 Remittance Detail Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

5.8.2.2 Running the Remittance Details report
To run the Remittance Details report:
1. Select Reporting - Payment Factory - Remittance Detail Report.
2. In the Remittance Detail Report - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.

114

Chapter 6

Managing bank-reported activity

Bank-reported activity is activity sent from a bank to your organization through a statement to
confirm the processing of instructed activity or other items (receipts, bank fees, and so on). In CMM,
a single unit of bank-reported activity is called a bank transaction.

6.1 Capturing bank statements, transactions, and balances
You can capture bank statements, transactions, and balances in CMM by importing them from
external banks or entering them using one of the following functions:

•

Enter Bank Statement

•

Enter Bank Transactions.

6.1.1 Importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files
Usually, you import bank statements, transactions, and balances from files provided by external
banks.

Note: When you import bank statement, transaction, and balance files, CMM validates bank
statement numbers and opening and closing bank balance values.

6.1.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Create Cash and Holdings Balance

•

Default Bank Stmt Rule type for External Account

•

Display Datanet Checkbox on Bank Transaction Import

•

Post Processing Enabled for B&T loads with Errors.

For more information, see
Static data

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Cash flow types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

115

Interfaces

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0201 Import Bank Transaction Files

•

FG-0201.01 Browse Bank Transaction Files

•

FG-0201.02 Edit Bank Transaction Files

•

FG-0202 Undo Bank Transaction File Imports

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, banks, bank
accounts, and cash flow types of the bank statements, transactions, and balances you
want to import.
For more information, see
Bank-reported
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring bank transaction rules

•

Configuring bank transaction validation rules

•

Configuring intraday bank statement processing rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.1.1.2 Importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files
You can import bank statement, transaction, and balance files on a regular basis by scheduling the
Bank Transaction Loader task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.

116

You can also import bank statement, balance, and transaction files on a one-time basis using the
Import Bank Transaction Files function:
1. Select Banking - Capture - Import Bank Transaction Files.
2. In the Bank Transaction File Import page:

–

If the files are in the location designated by the appropriate interchange or the Default File
Import Directory configuration parameter:
a. Select the appropriate interchange in the Interchange Name list to only import files for that
interchange.
b. Click Import Bank Transaction Files.

–

If the files are in another location:
a. Click Upload Files….
b. In the Upload Bank Transaction Import Files page, click Find Files.
c.

In the resulting dialog, navigate to and select the first file you want to import.

d. Click Open.
e. Repeat steps b to d for each file you want to import.
f.

In the Upload Bank Transaction Import Files page, select the location to which you want
to upload the files in the Upload to Location list.

g. Do one of the following:

–

To upload the selected files to the selected location, click Upload Selected File(s). (You can
later import the files using the Bank Transaction File Import page or the Task
Scheduler function.)

–

To import the selected files, click Import Selected File(s).

If you have access to FG-0201.01 Browse Bank Transaction Files or FG-0201.02 Edit Bank
Transaction Files, click Browse Files in the Bank Transaction File Import page before import to do the
following:

•

View bank statement, balance, and transaction files if you have access to FG-0201.01 Browse
Bank Transaction Files

•

Edit bank statement, balance, and transaction files if you have access to FG-0201.02 Edit Bank
Transaction Files.

After importing bank statement, transaction, and balance files, CMM appends the files’ names with
the date and time of import and moves the files from their original location to one of the following
child folders:
Child folder

Reason

Archive

The file is formatted correctly and imported successfully. However, the file may still
contain content errors.

Error

The file contains a syntax error or is a duplicate.

UFO

The file’s format is not recognizable.

WebSuite User Guide

117

You can drill down on the numbers to view related records in the job log. There are three possible
errors with bank statement, transaction, and balance file imports that the job log notes:

•

Bank accounts specified in the files are missing in CMM.

•

The bank statement validation failed.

•

The bank balance validation failed.

After you have corrected these errors, go to the Review Job Log function, drill down on the task, and
click Reload Errors. CMM verifies that the errors have been corrected, locking the process on an
import-by-import basis to prevent multiple users from clicking Reload Errors at the same time and
generating duplicate data.
For more information on the Review Job Log function, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.1.1.3 Undoing bank statement, transaction, and balance file imports
To undo a bank statement, transaction, and balance file import:
1. Select Banking - Capture - Undo Bank Transaction File Imports.
2. In the Balance & Transaction Load - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Balance & Transaction Load Report page, click Undo in the bank statement, transaction,
and balance file import’s row.
5. In the Undo Balance & Transaction Load Confirmation page, click Undo Bank File Import to undo the
import for the complete file.

6.1.1.3.1 Undoing at account level
If the Enable Undo of Bank Transaction Imports by Bank Account parameter is set to True
(search for this parameter in the WebSuite System Admininstration Guide), another button appears
in the Undo Balance & Transaction Load Confirmation page: Undo Bank File Import by Account. This allows
you to select one or several Bank Account Statements from the file for the undo process. To undo at
account level:
1. In the Undo Balance & Transaction Load Confirmation page, click Undo Bank File Import by Account.
2. In the Bank Transaction Undo By Account Selection Criteria page, enter selection criteria.
3. Click Report.
4. In the Bank Transaction Undo by Account page, select those accounts you wish to undo and click
Undo Selected Transaction Groups.

6.1.2 Entering bank statements, transactions, and balances
In some situations, you may need to enter bank statements, transactions, and balances in CMM.
You can do this using the Enter Bank Statement and Enter Bank Transactions functions.

Warning:

118

If you are upgrading from a release prior to CMM 7.1, do not enter cross-currency
cash records in the Enter Bank Transactions function until you have completed the
procedures documented in the WSS Enhancements Guide.

You can also generate bank transactions for internal cash records without corresponding external
bank-reported activity. For more information, see Reconciling internal cash records without
corresponding bank transactions.

6.1.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering bank statements, transactions, and balances:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

ACM Posting Validation for Transaction Entry

•

Bank Account Type For Transaction Entry

•

Default Bank Stmt Rule type for External Account

•

Default Bank Stmt Rule type for External Account

•

Transaction Amount Additional Validation for Transaction Entry.

For more information, see
Static data

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities and Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts and Managing counterparty bank
accounts)

•

Cash flow types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0053 Bank Statement Entry

•

FG-0388 Enter Bank Transactions.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, banks, bank accounts,
and cash flow types of the bank statements, transactions, and balances you want to enter.
For more information, see
Bank-reported
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring bank transaction rules

•

Configuring bank transaction validation rules

•

Configuring bank transaction quick entry

•

Configuring bank statement number rules

•

Configuring intraday bank statement processing rules

•

Configuring bank balance type access

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

119

6.1.2.2 Entering bank statements, transactions, and balances
To enter a bank statement and its transactions and balances:
1. Select Enter Bank Statement.
2. In the Bank Statement Entry - Criteria Selection page, click New Entry.
3. In the New Bank Statement page, enter the bank statement.
4. Click Continue.
5. In the Bank Statement Entry page, enter the bank statement’s transactions and balances.
6. Click Save and Calculate.

6.1.2.3 Entering bank transactions (and adjustment cash records)
To enter bank transactions (and adjustment cash records):
1. Select Banking - Capture - Enter Bank Transactions:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Enter Transactions page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page:

–

To enter intraday bank transactions, select Current Day Report (Softbooked) in the
Report Level list.

–

To enter previous-day bank transactions, select Previous Day Report (Hardbooked) in the
Report Level list.

4. Click New Batch.
5. Enter the bank transactions.
The type of bank transactions you can enter in this function and the allowed bank balances
depend on the following configuration parameters:

–

ACM Posting Validation for Transaction Entry

–

Bank Account Type For Transaction Entry

–

Transaction Amount Additional Validation for Transaction Entry.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
6. Click Save.
7. Enter adjustment cash records.
8. Click Save.
You can also edit bank transactions and adjustment cash records and finalize intraday bank
transaction batches using this function.

6.2 Editing bank statements
After capturing a bank statement, you can edit it using the Enter Bank Statement function.

Note: You cannot edit closed bank statements. Nor can you edit imported bank statements apart
from the transaction description (Bank Transaction import rules are not triggered by any
updates made to this description).

120

6.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for editing bank statements:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0053 Bank Statement Entry.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, banks, bank
accounts, and cash flow types of the bank statements you want to edit.
For more information, see
Bank-reported
activity workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Capturing bank statements, transactions, and balances.

6.2.2 Editing bank statements
To edit a bank statement:
1. Select Banking - Capture - Enter Bank Statement.
2. In the Bank Statement Entry - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Statement List page, drill down on the bank statement.
5. In the Bank Statement Entry page, click New Transaction.
6. In the second Bank Statement Entry page, edit the bank statement.
7. Click Save and Calculate.

6.3 Closing and exporting bank statements
After capturing and editing bank statements, you can complete the following tasks:

•

Close close-ended bank statements

•

Export bank statements.

You can close closed-ended bank statements by scheduling a task in the Task Scheduler function or
using the Export Bank Statements or Close Bank Statements function. CMM then calculates the bank
statements’ statement balances and closes them. When CMM closes a closed-ended bank
statement, you can no longer book bank transactions against it or otherwise modify it.
You can export bank statements containing the same information as in the Bank Statement report
(see Running the Bank Statement report). This is beneficial in situations where you need to use the
information outside of CMM.
Exported bank statements can either be previous day (PDR) or intraday (CDR). You can export
statements multiple times per day whether they are PDR or CDR.

Note: While you can undo and redo bank statement exports, you cannot undo bank statement
closures.

Intraday (CDR) exports are supported for IHBs only.

WebSuite User Guide

121

6.3.1 Exporting empty close-ended bank statements
If you want to be able to export close-ended bank statements that are empty, you must:

•

Set the Allow Export of Empty Close-ended Bank Statements configuration parameter.

•

Set the Automatic Initialization of Bank Statements configuration parameter.

If you do this, the task scheduler closes/exports statements periodically without requiring
movement (transactions or balances). It then generates a new empty close-ended bank statement
when the current one is closed.

6.3.2 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for closing and exporting bank statements:
Category
Configuration
parameters

Tasks

•

Allow Export of Empty Close-Ended Bank Statements.
Ensure this is set if you want scheduled closure of close-ended bank statements to
occur, even when the bank statement is empty.

•

Automatic Initialization of Bank Statements.
Must be set to enable the auto incrementation of a statement upon closure/export.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Interfaces

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler

•

FG-0301 Bank Statement Export

•

FG-0372 Undo Bank Statement Export

•

FG-0389 Close Bank Statements.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, banks, bank
accounts, and cash flow types of the bank statements you want to close and export.
For more information, see
Bank-reported
activity workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Capturing bank statements, transactions, and balances.

6.3.3 Closing and exporting bank statements
You can close and export bank statements on a regular basis by scheduling the Bank Statement
Closure and Bank Statement Export tasks in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see
the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

122

You can also close and export bank statements on a one-time basis using the Export Bank
Statements function:
1. Select Banking - Bank Statement - Export Bank Statements:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Bank Statement Export page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, select the bank statement’s checkbox.
4. Do one of the following:

–

To close the bank statement, click Close Statements.

–

To export the bank statement, click Export Statements.

Exporting a closed-ended bank statement automatically closes the bank statement, assuming
the bank statement was not previously closed and is a PDR.
As an alternative to closing closed-ended bank statements in this function, you can close them in
the Close Bank Statements function.
Closing a User Controlled statement requires the existence of an export interchange. The Close Bank
Statement screen displays one line per statement regardless of the number of export interchanges.
The Export Bank Statement screen displays one line per statement and per interchange. This is
important because the export is done and recorded per interchange.
So if you select a statement line and click the Close or Export button, then all lines for this statement
will be marked as closed or exported.

6.3.4 Include parameter and export through multiple interchange
It is possible to export statements through several interchanges when you require different export
formats. In the Bank Statement Export criteria, the Include parameter controls export and re-export
per interchange.
The behaviour of the Include criteria is as follows:

•

New Transaction (incremental)
Export only those transactions/statements that are not yet exported. Statement Type details:

–

Open Ended
Exports not yet exported transactions (for the interchange) in the given period. Note that if
some transactions were previously exported, they will not be exported again but the
statement balances include all transactions in the period. There could be a mismatch
between transactions exported and statement balances if the format used includes both
transaction and balances. This would be recommended for the export of transactions only.

–

User Controlled
These statements are closed when exported so this parameter means export only
statements that have not yet been exported with that interchange.

–

External
Exports only statements that have not yet been exported with the corresponding
interchange.

•

Previously Exported transactions (Re-export)
Exports only transactions/statements that have already been exported for the corresponding
interchange.

•

Both (Full)

WebSuite User Guide

123

Exports everything regardless of whether or not it has already been exported with the
corresponding interchange.
For the User Controlled statement, this is equivalent to using "Both", because exporting a
statement also closes it. The distinction between "Previously Exported" and "Both" is important
for Open Ended Statements (periodic).

6.4 Updating and recalculating bank balances
CMM allows you to update and recalculate actual and forecast amounts of bank balances. You can do
this automatically, using the Task Scheduler, Calculate Bank Balances, and Recalculate IHB Account
Balances functions or manually using the Update Bank Balances function.

6.4.1 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances
The Task Scheduler and Calculate Bank Balances functions allow you to automatically update and
recalculate bank balances for internal and external bank accounts.
In addition, the Recalculate IHB Account Balances function allows you to automatically update and
recalculate bank balances for internal bank accounts only.

6.4.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for automatically updating and recalculating bank balances:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Enable Entity Security For Calculate Bank Balances

•

Rounding Method for Balance Calculation.

For more information, see
Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0006 Recalculate all IHB Account Balances

•

FG-0220 Calculate and Update Bank Balances

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, banks, and bank accounts of the
bank balances you want to automatically update and recalculate.
For more information, see

124

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.4.1.2 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for internal and external bank
accounts
You can automatically update and recalculate bank balances on a regular basis by scheduling the
Bank Balance Update task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite
System Admin Guide.
You can also automatically update and recalculate bank balances on a one-time basis using the
Calculate Bank Balances function:
1. Select Banking - Bank Balance - Calculate Bank Balances.
2. In the Calculate and Update Bank Balances page, click Calculate and Update Bank Balances.
3. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

6.4.1.3 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for internal bank accounts
You can automatically update and recalculate bank balances for internal bank accounts (as well as
external bank accounts) using the procedure in Automatically updating and recalculating bank
balances for internal and external bank accounts. Alternatively, you can do the following:
1. Select Banking - Bank Balance - Recalculate IHB Account Balances.
2. In the Recalculate All In House Bank Account Balances page, enter the date on which you want
to begin recalculating balances in the Recalculate From Date field.
3. Click Recalculate.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

6.4.1.4 Automatically updating and recalculating bank balances for external bank accounts
You can automatically update and recalculate bank balances for external bank accounts (as well as
internal bank accounts) using the procedure in Automatically updating and recalculating bank
balances for internal and external bank accounts.
When you automatically update and recalculate bank balances for external bank accounts:

•

CMM updates the actual and forecast amounts of all bank balances with statuses set to
Forecast.

•

CMM updates opening and closing transaction and value date bank balances from the starting
date to the current server date as well as opening transaction and value date bank balance for
the next server date.

•

If the update and recalculation process occurs between midnight and 3:00 AM, CMM considers
the current server date to be the previous day.

•

If no bank balance of any kind is available, CMM creates an actual bank balance, using the
current server date as the balance date.

•

CMM completes the above steps for all external bank accounts.

The starting date is the last date for which there is an active opening transaction date or value date
bank balance (regardless of whether the bank balance’s status is set to Actual or Forecast). Thus,
the starting date varies across bank accounts and bank balance types.

Note: If there is an actual bank balance for a date very far in the past, the update and

recalculation process may take a long time to complete because it will update forecast
bank balances from this date.

Note:

•

If your organization regularly imports balance and transaction files from banks for all of its
external bank accounts, scheduling the automatic update and recalculation of bank balances,
while preferable, is not necessary. This is because importing balance and transaction files

WebSuite User Guide

125

updates value date bank balances from the value date of the earliest transaction found for each
concerned bank account.

•

If your organization does not import balance and transaction files from banks for all of its bank
accounts, scheduling the automatic update and recalculation of bank balances on a nightly basis
is preferable.

•

If some bank accounts contain actual bank balances but the dates of these bank balances is very
far in the past, you must manually update the actual transaction date and value date
bank balances for these bank accounts for a date that is as close to the current server date as
possible. Once done, you can complete an automatic update and recalculation, which will be
faster and more manageable. (See the next section for information on manually updating and
recalculating bank balances.)

•

Do not schedule automatic update and recalculation to run more frequently than necessary.

•

Do not schedule automatic update and recalculation to run during CMM’s peak usage time.

•

Do not schedule automatic update and recalculation to run in parallel with or close to similar
tasks that can update bank balances (for example, Internal Bank Transactions Generation and
Bank Transaction Loader).

6.4.2 Manually updating and recalculating bank balances
The Update Bank Balances function allows you to manually update and recalculate actual and
forecast amounts for the following bank balance types:

•

Transaction date

•

Value date

•

Deferred

•

Blocked.

6.4.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for manually updating and recalculating bank balances:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Enable Entity Security For Calculate Bank Balances

•

Rounding Method for Balance Calculation.

For more information, see
Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0131 Bank Balance Update.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, banks, and bank accounts of the
bank balances you want to manually update and recalculate.
For more information, see

126

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.4.2.2 Manually updating and recalculating bank balances
To manually update and recalculate bank balances:
1. Select Banking - Bank Balance - Update Bank Balances.
2. In the Bank Balance Update - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Bank Balance Update Cont. - Criteria Selection page, enter additional search criteria.
5. Click Continue.
6. In the Bank Balance Update - Create/Update Balance page, enter data in the fields as
determined by the option you selected in the Balance Type list in step 4:
If you selected

Procedure

Transaction Date Balance

Enter opening and closing
the two fields.

transaction date bank balances in

Value Date Balance

Enter opening and closing
fields.

value date bank balances in the two

Deferred Balance

Enter the deferred bank balance in the field.

Blocked Balance

Enter the blocked bank balance in the field.

7. Do one of the following:

–

To enter a new bank balance, click Create.

–

To update an existing bank balance, click Update.

–

To update an existing bank balance and create any missing opening or closing
bank balances, click Update/Create.

–

To update an existing bank balance and recalculate bank balances from the selected day to
the present day, click Update and Recalculate.
Update and Recalculate is only available if you are updating value date bank balances of internal
or external bank accounts, or transaction date bank balances of internal bank accounts.

6.4.2.3 Manually recalculating value date bank balances
As shown in the following example, manually recalculating value date bank balances of external
bank accounts can result in potential discrepancies:
1. Using the Update Bank Balances function, a user updates the opening and closing value date
bank balances of an external bank account for February 2.

WebSuite User Guide

127

CMM updates the February 2 value date bank balances’ actual and forecast amounts and sets
their statuses to Actual:

2. The user recalculates subsequent value date bank balances.
CMM rolls forward the February 2 closing value date bank balance to the February 3 opening
value date bank balance, setting the latter bank balance’s status to Actual. CMM then
recalculates value date bank balances up to the next business day (February 5) opening
value date bank balance, setting these bank balances’ statuses to Forecast:

3. The user updates the opening and closing value date bank balances of the previous day
(February 1) and recalculates subsequent value date bank balances:
CMM updates the February 1 value date bank balances’ actual and forecast amounts and sets
their statuses to Actual. CMM then rolls forward the February 1 closing value date bank balance
to the February 2 opening value date bank balance. Finally, CMM recalculates the February 3
value date bank balance’s forecast amount and all subsequent value date bank balances’ actual
and forecast amounts up to the February 5 opening value date bank balance (assuming these
bank balances’ statuses are set to Forecast):

CMM does not recalculate the February 2 closing value date bank balance forecast and actual
amounts and the February 3 opening value date bank balance actual amount because these
bank balances’ statuses are set to Actual.

128

To avoid such discrepancies:

•

Only manually update bank balances on an exceptional basis.

•

When manually updating bank balances, always recalculate subsequent bank balances.

•

When manually updating and recalculating bank balances, use reliable figures, preferably from
valid bank statements.

•

When manually updating and recalculating bank balances, do so for as recent a date as possible.

•

If you need to update a bank balance for a date earlier than the earliest one for which you have
actual bank balances, manually update bank balances for dates going forward to correct the
actual bank balances. (Recalculating bank balances does not update actual amounts if the bank
balances’ statuses are set to Actual.)

6.5 Exporting bank balances
You can export bank balances to TRM if your organization is using CMM as part of Wallstreet Suite.

Note: To export bank balances to TRM, you must set up settlement instructions for the

appropriate entities and the entities must be in "Final Status" in TRM’s static data
manager.

6.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for closing and exporting bank statements:
Category

Tasks

Interfaces

Ensure the following interface data are available:
•

Interchanges.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler

•

FG-0332 Export Bank Account Balance.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, banks, and bank accounts of the bank
balances you want to export.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.5.2 Exporting bank balances
You can export bank balances to TRM on a regular basis by scheduling the Bank Account Balance
Export task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin
Guide.
You can also export bank balances to TRM on a one-time basis using the Export Bank Account
Balance function:
1. Select Banking - Bank Balance - Export Bank Account Balance.
2. In the Export Bank Account Balance - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Export Balances.

WebSuite User Guide

129

6.6 Analyzing bank statements, transactions, and balances
You can analyze bank statements, transactions, and balances by running the following reports:

•

Bank Statement

•

Bank Transaction

•

Bank Balance Analysis

•

International Bank Balances

•

Returned Checks.

Note: The Bank Statement report is useful for viewing bank transactions and balances assigned

to specific bank statements. The other reports are useful for listing bank transactions and
bank balances without regard to their assigned bank statements.

6.6.1 Running the Bank Statement report
The Bank Statement report allows you to view bank statements. Like an external bank, CMM can
produce statements for bank accounts. These statements can display bank transaction information,
including the following:

•

Bank account

•

Date range

•

Opening balance

•

Booked transactions

•

Resulting closing balance.

6.6.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Bank Statement report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0364 Bank Statement.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the bank statements you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Bank Statement.

For more information, see
Bank-reported
activity setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Configuring bank balance type access.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

130

6.6.1.2 Running the Bank Statement report
To run the Bank Statement report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Bank Statement:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Bank Statement page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

6.6.2 Running the Bank Transaction report
The Bank Transaction report can provide detailed information regarding all bank transactions in
CMM. It is similar to the Cash Transaction report but is intended for bank-reported activity rather
than expected or instructed activity.

6.6.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Bank Transaction report:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Treat Self-owned IC Accts As Regular IC Accts.

For more information, see
Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0008 Bank Transaction Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the bank transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Bank Transaction Report.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.6.2.2 Running the Bank Transaction report
To run the Bank Transaction report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Bank Transaction Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Bank Transaction Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

WebSuite User Guide

131

6.6.3 Running the Bank Balance Analysis report
The Bank Balance Analysis report allows you to view an entity’s, bank’s, or bank account group’s
opening and closing bank balances for a specified date range. This allows you to observe and
analyze the flow of funds in and out of the related bank accounts.
In particular, the Bank Balance Analysis report:

•

Displays all bank balances on the selected day or days.

•

Does not discriminate between actual and forecast bank balances.

•

Can display bank balances’ actual amounts, forecast amounts, or both in addition to other data
attributes.
Do not confuse a bank balance’s amounts (actual and forecast) with its status (Actual or
Forecast).
Displays what is actually available in CMM. If, for some reason, there is inconsistent data due to
the manual update and recalculation process (see Updating and recalculating bank balances),
they will appear in this function.

•

6.6.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Bank Balance Analysis report:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Treat Self-owned IC Accts As Regular IC Accts.

For more information, see
Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0002 Bank Balance Analysis.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the bank balances you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Bank Balance Analysis.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.6.3.2 Running the Bank Balance Analysis report
To run the Bank Balance Analysis report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Bank Balance Analysis:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Bank Balance Analysis page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

132

6.6.4 Running the International Bank Balances report
The International Bank Balances report presents the bank balances in one or more bank account
groups.
This report presents actual bank balances imported into CMM. The date you enter in the
Balance Date as at field on the initial criteria page is the last date of the bank-reported balances.
After loading the previous day’s bank files into CMM, you can run this report to determine which
accounts are low and may require additional funds, and which accounts have a surplus of cash that
can be invested. You can generate this report to determine your organization’s worldwide or regional
position.
In addition, you can use the bank account group functionality to group sets of accounts together for
combined reporting. For example, you can create groups based on regional structure, currency,
account function, and business structure.
The information in this report is also useful if your organization holds one or more accounts with a
bank that does not provide regular updates on the balances. A balance in the report that is several
weeks old may indicate that your organization needs to update the balance (either manually or
through the previous-day report).

6.6.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the International Bank Balances report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0047 International Bank Account Balances.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
bank balances you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Static data

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Bank account groups (see Managing bank account groups).

6.6.4.2 Running the International Bank Balances report
To run the International Bank Balances report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - International Bank Account Balances.
2. In the International Bank Account Balances - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Select Bank Account Groups.
4. In the International Bank Account Balances page, select bank account groups.
5. Do one of the following:

–

To run the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To run the report in a spreadsheet application, click View in Spreadsheet.

6.6.5 Running the Returned Checks report
The Returned Checks report allows you to view returned checks that match your criteria.

WebSuite User Guide

133

6.6.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Returned Checks report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0009 Browse Returned Cheques.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
bank transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

6.6.5.2 Running the Returned Checks report
To run the Returned Checks report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Review Returned Checks.
2. In the Browse Returned Cheques - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Search.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application, click View in Spreadsheet.

If no returned checks match your criteria, a warning message displays.

134

Chapter 7

Reconciling activity

After capturing and processing forecasted, expected, instructed, and bank-reported activity in CMM,
you must reconcile this activity to determine your organization’s current position. You can then take
appropriate actions based on this position.
CMM supports two levels of reconciliation:

•

Cash

•

Accounting.

In both levels, you mark activity as reconciled. However, there are differences between the two (as
defined in the WSS Cash Management Concepts Guide), and they are designed to function parallel to
and independently of each other.

7.1 Reconciling activity at the cash level
Reconciling at the cash level allows you to verify prior day bank-reported activity against forecasted
activity, rolling forward or canceling differences between the two.
If there is a difference in amounts between forecasts and cash records, or forecasts and bank
transactions, you can enter adjustment forecasts to make up this difference. To do this, you need to
run a report that includes one of the var data attributes.
As explained in the following table, bank transactions and cash records can be automatically
reconciled at the cash level if reconciled at the accounting level:

Record type

Automatically
reconciled at the
accounting level

Manually reconciled at the accounting level

Bank
transaction

Automatically
reconciled at the
cash level

Automatically reconciled at the cash level if the Reconciliation Cash
Reconciled Indicator configuration parameter is set to True.

Cash record

Automatically
reconciled at the
cash level

Automatically reconciled at the cash level

Adjustment
cash record

Automatically
reconciled at the
cash level

Automatically reconciled at the cash level

For more information on the Reconciliation Cash Reconciled Indicator configuration parameter, see
the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Note: Unreconciling a bank transaction or cash record at the accounting level does not
unreconcile it at the cash level.

WebSuite User Guide

135

7.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reconciling activity at the cash level:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Reconciliation Cash Reconciled Indicator.

For more information, see
Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0370 Cash Reconciliation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the activity you want to reconcile at the cash level.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cash Reconciliation.

For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Managing forecasted activity

•

Managing expected and instructed activity

•

Managing bank-reported activity.

7.1.2 Reconciling activity at the cash level
To reconcile activity at the cash level:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Cash Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, select activity’s checkboxes to mark it as reconciled.
You can view an activity’s details before marking it as reconciled it by drilling down on it.
If you are reconciling forecasts and transactions, only mark the forecasts as reconciled.
Otherwise, the activity will not display in current available amounts.
4. Click Reconcile Selected.

7.1.3 Undoing reconciliation
To undo reconciliation:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Cash Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, display the Selection Criteria section’s controls.

136

4. Select Reconciled in the Cash Reconciliation Status list.
If the Cash Reconciliation Status list does not display, you can modify the report template’s criteria
set to include it. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
5. Click Refresh.
The report template now displays reconciled, rather than unreconciled, forecasts, bank
transactions, and cash records.
6. Select the appropriate reconciled amount’s checkbox.
You can view an amount’s details before undoing cash-level reconciliation by drilling down on it.
7. Click Unreconcile Selected.

7.1.4 Entering adjustment forecasts
To enter adjustment forecasts:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Cash Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, drill down on a variance amount.
4. In the Cash Reconciliation – Adjust Forecast page:

–

To accept the displayed adjustment forecast as is:
a. Select Save in the adjustment forecast’s Action list.
b. Click Save.

–

To enter additional adjustment forecasts:
a. Click Add Adjustment once for each adjustment forecast you want to create.
b. Enter the adjustment forecasts, ensuring the total of their amounts equals the variance.
c.

Select Save in each adjustment forecast’s Action list.

d. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

137

7.1.5 Showing deviation between selected activities
In the report format you can switch on the Show deviation on selection switch to display differences
between selected activities:
Select Banking - Reconciliation - Cash Reconciliation:

•

Expand Configure.

•

Select the Report Format.

•

Click Format Editor.

•

At the bottom of the screen. click Continue.

•

Switch on the Show deviation on selection switch.

This dynamically displays totals and absolute deviations when you select different elements in the
report. This offers more flexibility than Variance as it is not constrained by the report format
choices. Variance shows the difference based on the report grouping and not on the selected items.
Unlike the variance, the deviation does not allow you to process the difference. The screenshot
below shows the totals and deviation displayed at the bottom of the report.

If you have large reports, you can keep the deviation information and buttons permanently
displayed by enabling scrollable tables: Admin - User Options, click Set Defaults, then switch on Enable
Scrollable Tables.

7.2 Reconciling activity at the accounting level
Reconciling activity at the accounting level verifies previous-day or intraday bank-reported activity
against expected or instructed activity, creating adjustment cash records as required and updating
bank balances.

Note: A bank transaction must be mapped to cash flow type to reconcile at the accounting level.

138

7.2.1 Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically
Automatic reconciliation is the quickest way to reconcile bank transactions to cash records at the
accounting level. You can schedule automatic reconciliation or manually invoke it.
The following diagrams presents the process CMM following when reconciling bank transactions to
cash records automatically:

7.2.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Allow Generic Date Updating In Reconcile Process

•

Disable Reconciliation During Import

•

Reconciliation Cash Record Status

•

Reconciliation Cheque Number Validation

•

Reconciliation Start Page

•

Reconciliation Value Date Validation

•

Updating Value Date In Reconciliation.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

139

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0108 Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the bank transactions and cash records you want to reconcile automatically.
For more information, see
Reconciliation
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring reconciliation processing

•

Configuring reconciliation tolerance groups and rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Reconciliation
workflow

Ensure the following workflow tasks have been completed:
•

Managing expected and instructed activity

•

Managing bank-reported activity.

7.2.1.2 Scheduling automatic reconciliation
CMM completes automatic reconciliation after importing bank transaction files. Therefore, if you
have scheduled bank transaction file imports in the Task Scheduler function, you do not need to
schedule automatic reconciliation as well in most situations. However, there is a separate task
available in the Task Scheduler function for automatic reconciliation in case you need to schedule it
separately. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

7.2.1.3 Manually invoking automatic reconciliation
To manually invoke automatic reconciliation:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Bank Reconciliation:

–

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Bank Transaction:

–
–

In the Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate
bank batch.

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Cross Batch Search:
a. In the Cross-Batch Unreconciled Transaction - Criteria Selection page, enter search
criteria.
b. Click Search.

2. In the Transactions Which Could Not Be Reconciled page, click Auto-Reconcile.

7.2.2 Reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually
Usually, you complete manual reconciliation if automatic reconciliation did not successfully reconcile
all bank transactions to cash records.
Two methods of manual reconciliation are available in CMM:

•

Many-to-many

•

One-to-many.

You complete many-to-many reconciliation using the Manual Reconciliation function and
one-to-many reconciliation using the Bank Reconciliation function.

140

Note: Wallstreet recommends you use the Manual Reconciliation function because it contains

functionality not available in the Bank Reconciliation function. However, if you need to
reconcile intraday bank transactions (or "CDRs") to cash records, you must do so using the
Bank Reconciliation function.

7.2.2.1 "4-eyes" security
If your system requires "4-eyes" security when reconciling bank transactions manually (the Reconcile
button), then reconciled transactions will pass to an "interim reconciled" status. This means that a
user other than the original reconciler, and who has the correct security profile, must accept the
reconciliation before it becomes finalized (the Accept Reconciliation button). See the WebSuite System
Admin Guide for details.

7.2.2.2 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Allow Description Update on One-to-Many Reconciliation

•

Default Payment Method for Transactions

•

Reconcile By Entity

•

Reconciliation Cash Record Status

•

Reconciliation Start Page.

For more information, see
Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0108 Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation

•

FG-0108.02 Create Reconciliation Adjustments

•

FG-0379 Manual Reconciliation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the bank transactions and cash records you want to reconcile manually.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Manual Reconciliation.

For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically.

141

7.2.2.3 Reconciling many bank transactions to many cash records
To reconcile many bank transactions to many cash records:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Manual Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Manual Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, select the bank transactions’ and cash records’ checkboxes.
As you select checkboxes:

–

The Bank Transactions field displays the total amount of selected bank transactions

–

The Cash Records field displays the total amount of selected cash records

–

The Difference field displays the difference between the two.

If you are reconciling across external bank accounts, these fields do not consider foreign
exchange rates. As a result, their values will not be accurate if you select bank transactions and
cash records across currencies.
You can edit cash records’ Description, Counterparty Message, and Bank Instructions fields if the report
template includes those fields. To save your changes, select the cash records’ checkboxes and
click Update Records.
4. Click Reconcile:

–

If the difference between the bank transactions’ and cash records’ amounts is zero, do not
continue to step 5.

–

If the difference between the bank transactions’ and cash records’ amounts is not zero and
you can create adjustment cash records, continue to step 5.

–

If the difference between the bank transactions’ and cash records’ amounts is not zero but
you cannot create adjustment cash records, return to step 3 and select bank transactions
and cash records such that the difference between them is zero.

To create adjustment cash records, you need security by function access to FG-0108.02 Create
Reconciliation Adjustments.
Alternatively, you can finalize bank transactions without corresponding cash records by clicking
Finalize Records. For more information, see Reconciling bank transactions without corresponding
cash records.
5. In the Reconciliation - Adjust Imbalance page, enter an adjustment cash record.
6. Click Save & Continue:

–

If the difference between the selected bank transaction and cash records plus the
adjustment cash record is zero, do not continue to step 7.

–

If the difference between the selected bank transaction and cash records plus the
adjustment cash record is not zero, continue to step 7.

7. In the Reconciliation - Adjust Imbalance page:

142

–

Click Add Cash Record to add an additional adjustment cash record. Repeat steps 5 to 6.

–

Click Clear Adjustments to remove all adjustment cash records. Click Add Cash Record and repeat
steps 5 to 6.

7.2.2.4 Reconciling one bank transaction to many cash records
To reconcile one bank transaction to many cash records:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Bank Reconciliation:

–

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Bank Transaction:

–
–

In the Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate
bank batch.

2. In the Transactions Which Could Not Be Reconciled page, enter search criteria in the Cash
Record Filter section.
You can also filter the unreconciled bank transaction table on this page by entering search
criteria in the Bank Transaction Filter section and clicking Filter.
3. Drill down on the bank transaction you want to reconcile.
4. In the Reconcile Selected Bank Transaction page, select the appropriate cash records’
checkboxes.
You can edit cash records’ Description fields. When you reconcile, CMM saves your edits. However,
if you choose not to reconcile, you can also save your edits by clicking Update Description.
5. Click Continue:

–

If the total amounts of the bank transaction and cash records match exactly (in other words,
the difference is zero), do not continue to step 6.

–

If the total amounts of the bank transaction and cash records do not match exactly (in other
words, the difference is not zero) and you can create adjustment cash records, continue to
step 6.

–

If the total amounts of the bank transactions and cash records do not match exactly but you
cannot create adjustment cash records, return to step 4 and select cash records such that
the difference between them and the bank transaction is zero.

To create adjustment cash records, you need security by function access to FG-0108.02 Create
Reconciliation Adjustments.
6. In the Reconciliation - Adjust Imbalance page, enter an adjustment cash record.
7. Click Save & Continue:

–

If the difference between the selected bank transaction and cash records plus the
adjustment cash record is zero, do not continue to step 8.

–

If the difference between the selected bank transaction and cash records plus the
adjustment cash record is not zero, continue to step 8.

If you have set a default cash flow type in the user options (see “Setting your user options” on
page 51) it will display by default as the cash flow type of your adjustment cash records.
8. In the Reconciliation - Adjust Imbalance p:

–

Click Add Cash Record to add an additional adjustment cash record. Repeat steps 6 to 7.

–

Click Clear Adjustments to remove all adjustment cash records. Click Add Cash Record and repeat
steps 6 to 7.

WebSuite User Guide

143

7.2.3 Reconciling bank transactions without corresponding cash records
If there are no corresponding cash records for one or more bank transactions, you can select those
bank transactions in the Manual Reconciliation function and click Reconcile. CMM generates a single
adjustment cash record for the multiple bank transactions. Later, when you finalize bank balances,
CMM generates a single posting entry for the multiple bank transactions.
If, however, you want to generate multiple posting entries for multiple bank transactions, you can
select those bank transactions in the Manual Reconciliation function and click Finalize Records. CMM
generates one cloned cash record for each selected bank transactions and then reconciles the bank
transactions and cloned cash records. CMM also generates one posting entry for each selected bank
transaction.

7.2.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reconciling bank transactions without corresponding cash
records:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0379 Manual Reconciliation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank
accounts of the bank transactions you want to reconcile.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Manual Reconciliation.

For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically.

7.2.3.2 Reconciling bank transactions without corresponding cash records
To reconcile bank transactions without corresponding cash records:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Manual Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Manual Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, select the bank transactions’ checkboxes.
4. Click Finalize Records.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

7.2.4 Reconciling internal cash records without corresponding bank transactions
CMM allows you to generate internal bank transactions for internal cash records, and it
automatically reconciles these bank transactions to their originating cash records. (You need to do
this because internal cash records are not released to banks and, therefore, do not have
corresponding external bank transactions.)

144

Depending on your organization’s setup, internal bank transactions can be captured in one of the
following states:

•

Intraday in which case the bank transactions are "soft" reconciled to their corresponding cash
records

•

Previous day in which case they are "hard" reconciled to their corresponding cash records.

If internal bank transactions are captured in the intraday state, you can "hard" reconcile them by
scheduling the appropriate task in the Task Scheduler function or by using the Close Internal Bank
Transactions function.

Note: If your organization has upgraded from a release prior to CMM 7.1, you need to initialize
internal bank transactions and verify internal bank balances before completing this
procedure for the first time. For more information, see the WSS Enhancements Guide.

7.2.4.1 Generated interbank transactions and internal financial transactions
Financial transactions also can be entered with an IHB (counterparty) and settled on internal bank
accounts. In this case the corresponding records carry the cashflow type details as well as the target
transaction number. This information is transferred to the bank transaction when generating
interbank transactions. It can also be available at bank statement export.

7.2.4.2 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reconciling internal cash records without corresponding bank
transactions:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler

•

FG-0330 Generate Internal Bank Transactions

•

FG-0341 Bank Transactions Closure.

In addition, ensure you have access to the in-house banks of the internal cash records
you want to reconcile.
For more information, see
Reconciliation setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Configuring internal bank transaction generation.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Reconciliation
workflow

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Managing expected and instructed activity.

7.2.4.3 Generating internal bank transactions
You can generate internal bank transaction files on a regular basis by scheduling the Internal Bank
Transactions Generation task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.
You can also generate internal bank transactions on a one-time basis using the Generate Internal
Bank Transactions function:
1. Select Banking - Bank Statement - Generate Internal Bank Transactions.

WebSuite User Guide

145

If the Initialize Historical Internal Bank Transactions page opens when you select this function,
you need to initialize internal bank transactions before proceeding. For more information, see
the WSS Enhancements Guide.
2. In the Generate Internal Bank Transactions page:

–

To generate internal bank transactions for a specific in-house bank, select that an in-house
bank in the In House Bank list.

–

To generate internal bank transactions for all in-house banks, select All in the In House Bank
list.

3. Click Generate.
4. Click View Log File.
5. In the Review Job Log function, review the job log to ensure the generation was successful. For
more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

7.2.4.4 Closing internal bank transactions
You can close internal bank transaction files on a regular basis by scheduling the Bank Transactions
Closure task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin
Guide.
You can also close internal bank transactions on a one-time basis using the Close Internal Bank
Transactions function:
1. Select Banking - Bank Statement - Close Internal Bank Transactions.
2. In the Close Internal Bank Transactions page:

–

To close internal bank transactions for a specific in-house bank, select that an in-house bank
in the In House Bank list.

–

To close internal bank transactions for all in-house banks, select All in the In House Bank list.

3. Click Close Bank Transactions.
4. Click View Log File.
5. In the Review Job Log function, review the job log to ensure the closure was successful. For
more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

7.2.5 Undoing reconciliation
If you have reconciled bank transactions to cash records in error, you can undo the reconciliation in
either the Manual Reconciliation or Bank Reconciliation function.

Note: When you unreconcile a cash record, CMM resets the cash record’s value and transaction
dates to their original values.

7.2.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for undoing reconciliation:
Category

146

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0108 Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation

•

FG-0379 Manual Reconciliation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the bank transactions and cash records you want to unreconcile.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Manual Reconciliation.

For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically

•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually.

7.2.5.2 Undoing reconciliation in the Manual Reconciliation function
To undo reconciliation in the Manual Reconciliation function:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Manual Reconciliation:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Manual Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, display the top Selection Criteria section’s controls:

4. Select Reconciled in the Bank Reconciliation Status list.
If the Bank Reconciliation Status list does not display, you can modify the report template’s criteria
set to include it. For more information, seethe WebSuite System Admin Guide.
5. Click Refresh.
The report template displays reconciled, rather than unreconciled, bank transactions and cash
records, and Reconcile is replaced with Unreconcile:

WebSuite User Guide

147

6. Select the appropriate bank transactions’ checkboxes.
7. Click Unreconcile.

7.2.5.3 Undoing reconciliation in the Bank Reconciliation function
To undo reconciliation in the Bank Reconciliationfunction:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Bank Reconciliation:

–

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Bank Transaction:

–
–

In the Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate
bank batch.

2. In the Transactions Which Could Not Be Reconciled page, click Review All Downloaded Bank Transactions.
3. In the All Batch Bank Transactions page, drill down on the appropriate bank transaction.
4. In the Unreconcile Bank Transaction page, click Unreconcile.

7.2.6 Finalizing bank balances
After you have reconciled all bank transactions to cash records for a particular batch, you can
finalize bank balances in the batch. This removes the batch from the reconciliation functionality and
updates the current and previous days’ closing balances and the next day’s opening balance with
actual balances from the bank.

148

Do not finalize bank balances until you have reviewed the batch’s bank transactions to ensure they
are reconciled to the appropriate cash records. You do not want to create new cash records that are
automatically linked to unreconciled bank transactions unless you are certain the cash records do
not exist in the database. Duplicate cash records can result otherwise.

7.2.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for finalizing bank balances:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Reconciliation Post Processing

•

Reconciliation Remove Outstanding Current Days

•

Reconciliation Start Page.

For more information, see
Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0108 Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the bank balances you want to finalize.
For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow tasks have been completed:
•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically

•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually.

7.2.6.2 Finalizing bank balances
To finalize bank balances:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Bank Reconciliation:

–

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Bank Transaction:

–
–

In the Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate
bank batch.

If the Reconciliation Start Page configuration parameter is set to Cross Batch Search:
a. In the Cross-Batch Unreconciled Transaction - Criteria Selection page, click Return to Batch
Selection.
b. In the Bank Transaction and Balance Reconciliation page, drill down on the appropriate
bank batch.

2. In the Transactions Which Could Not Be Reconciled page, click Review/Finalize Bank Balances.
3. In the Review and Finalize Closing Balances page, click Finalize Balances.
Before completing this step, carefully review the bank balances to ensure they are correct. There
is no undo for this process.

7.2.7 Entering cash allocations
After you have reconciled bank transactions to cash records, you can enter cash allocations on a
cash-record-by-cash-record basis.

WebSuite User Guide

149

7.2.7.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering cash allocations:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0054 Enter Cash Allocations.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, banks, and bank
accounts for which you want to enter cash allocations.
For more information, see
Reconciliation setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup task has been completed:
•

Configuring cash allocation groups and rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Reconciliation
workflow

Ensure the following workflow tasks have been completed:
•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records automatically

•

Reconciling bank transactions to cash records manually.

7.2.7.2 Entering cash allocations
To enter cash allocations:
1. Select Banking - Reconciliation - Enter Cash Allocations.
2. In the Reconciled Cash Record Search - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Reconciled Cash Records page, drill down on the appropriate reconciled cash record.
5. In the Cash Allocation Entry page:
a. Select Amounts to allocate by amount or Percentages to allocate by percentage in the Allocate
list.
b. Do the following:

–

To enter a new cash allocation, click Add Allocation and enter information in the resulting
row.

–

To edit an existing cash allocation, edit information in the appropriate row.

–

To delete an existing cash allocation, select its Del checkbox.

Click Save.

7.3 Analyzing reconciliation
You can analyze reconciliation by running the following reports:

•

Daily Reconciliation

•

Suspense Reconciliation.

You can also analyze reconciliation within the Bank Transaction Report and Cash Transaction report.

150

Note: These reports are relevant to accounting-level reconciliation but not to cash-level
reconciliation.

7.3.1 Running the Daily Reconciliation report
The Daily Reconciliation report presents reconciled bank transactions and cash records on a
bank-account-by-bank-account basis for a specified date range.

7.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Daily Reconciliation report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0015 Daily Reconciliation Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the banks and bank accounts of the reconciled
activity you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reconciliation
Workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Reconciling activity at the accounting level.

7.3.1.2 Running the Daily Reconciliation report
To run the Daily Reconciliation report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Daily Reconciliation Report.
2. In the Daily Reconciliation Report - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
Use the Bank Account Hierarchy filter to select a subset of accounts to search.
3. Click Report, alternatively click Generate PDF to open a new browser window and display a PDF
version of the report.

7.3.1.3 Classification in the Daily Reconciliation report
The different categories in the Daily Reconciliation report are:

•

Unreconciled Cash: cash records not reconciled

•

Unreconciled Bank: bank transactions not reconciled

•

Adjustments: adjustment cash records created in manual reconciliation when there is a
mismatch between cash records and bank transactions

•

Reconciled: reconciled bank transactions.

7.3.2 Running the Suspense Reconciliation report
The Suspense Reconciliation report presents reconciled bank transactions and cash records for a
specified bank account and date range.

WebSuite User Guide

151

7.3.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Suspense Reconciliation report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0246 Suspense Reconciliation Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the banks and bank accounts of the reconciled
activity you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reconciliation
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Reconciling activity at the accounting level.

7.3.2.2 Running the Suspense Reconciliation report
To run the Suspense Reconciliation report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Suspense Reconciliation Report.
2. In the Suspense Reconciliation Report - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Report.

7.3.3 Getting reconciliation data from the Bank Transaction report
For full details of the Bank Transaction report, see “Running the Bank Transaction report” on page
131.
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Bank Transaction Report and run it, ensuring that the Transaction Reconciliation
Indicator column is displayed.
2. Click the value in this column to display more detail in the Bank Transaction group Details page.
3. If the value in the Bank Reconciliation Status column is hyperlinked, you can click it to reveal
further details in the Bank Transaction Reconciliation Details page.

7.3.4 Getting reconciliation data from the Cash Transaction report
For full details of the Cash Transaction report, see “Running the Cash Transaction report” on page
113.
1. Select Reporting - Payment Factory - Cash Transaction Report.
2. Under Display Additional Information, switch on Reconciliation and click Display Information. This displays
reconcilation information below the Display Information button.

152

Chapter 8

Monitoring cash position

CMM includes two reports that allow you to monitor your organization’s cash position:

•

Cash Monitor

•

Cash Position.

These reports are based on the flexible reporting framework and are similar in structure and
content.

8.1 Running the Cash Monitor report
The Cash Monitor report allows you to create customized report templates that can display
forecasted, expected, instructed, and bank-reported activity. You can then run reports based on
these templates to analyze your organization’s cash position.
In addition, you can use the Cash Monitor report to sweep bank accounts according to their target
balance rules. For more information, see 12.1 Target balancing bank accounts on page 233.

8.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Cash Monitor report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0338 Cash Monitor.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the activity you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cash Monitor.

For more information, see
Configuration
parameters

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Treat Self-owned IC Accts As Regular IC Accts.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

153

8.1.2 Running the Cash Monitor report
To run the Cash Monitor report:
1. Select Banking - Target Balancing - Cash Monitor:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Monitor page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

8.2 Running the Cash Position report
The Cash Position report is identical to the Cash Monitor report; however, it does not include the
sweeping functionality.

8.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Cash Position report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0397 Cash Position.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the activity you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cash Position.

For more information, see
Configuration
parameters

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Treat Self-owned IC Accts As Regular IC Accts.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

8.2.2 Running the Cash Position report
To run the Cash Position report:
1. Select Reporting - Payment Factory - Cash Position:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Position page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

154

Chapter 9

Calculating cash balances

9.1 Definition and usage
A cash balance is the aggregate of all cash records booked in the system to a particular bank
account on a given date.
The calculation is done using the value date of the cash record. Each account every day has an
opening cash balance (equal to the closing balances of the previous day) and a closing system
balance.
The closing balance is the opening balance plus the sum of all cash records amounts on this account
with a value date on that day. This is done regardless of the cash record status.
This cash balance should match the corresponding bank balance on that value day for the account.
If they don't match, then cash records and bank transactions are not all reconciled and some actions
are required to identify where the difference in balance comes from. For example, some cash
records might not be fully authorized, or a bank transaction was not received for a cash record.
Cash balances are available in the Bank Balance Analysis report where they can be displayed along
with the corresponding bank balances.

9.2 Initialization
To access cash balance updates, you need security by function access to FG-0507 Cash Balance
Update.
To initialize the cash balance on an account, you specify manually an opening cash balance for a
date on an account. Follow these steps:
1. Select the menu option Banking-Cash Balance-Update Cash Balance.
2. Select the Entity and Account for which you would like to do the initialization.
3. Select the Bank Account, Balance Type (this version supports only one - Value Date), and the date
of initialization (Update Balances For):
This account has never had cash balances calculated or inserted so there are no opening or
closing balances, and the filed opening balance is empty.

WebSuite User Guide

155

9 Calculating cash balances
9.2 Initialization

4. Enter an initial Opening Balance amount and click:

–

Create to save the opening balance and calculate the closing balance for that day.

–

Create and Calculate to launch the balance calculation up to today.

9.2.1 Cash balance manual entry
This is how cash balance manual entry works:

•

Manual balance entry cannot be changed by calculation.

•

If no initialization is done on an account, the calculations will start at zero. Calculated balances
will be overwritten by the next calculation.

•

You can modify the initialization amount on the original initialization date.

•

You can reset both the initialization date and amount and recalculate balances.

9.2.2 Modifying the initialization amount
If the initialization criteria point to the date on which a previous initialization was done, the system
displays the manually entered opening balance:

You can modify the opening balance.
Your options are:

•

Update: modifies the opening and closing balance for that day.

•

Update and Recalculate: also launches a calculation up to today.

•

Remove All Cash Balances: removes all balances, including the previous initialization.

9.2.3 Modifying the initialization date and/or amount
You can modify the initialization date and or amount.

156

9 Calculating cash balances
9.3 Calculation

In Update Cash Balances, select the account and the new date:

A warning message displays the first initialization date. The Opening Balance field is not editable.
Click Remove All Cash Balances.
You can then proceed with the new initialization.

9.3 Calculation
The calculation of cash balances can be done manually in Calculate Cash Balances or automated
using the Task Scheduler.

9.3.1 Calculation using Task Scheduler
The Cash Balance calculation can be automated through the Task Scheduler. The task is called Cash
Balance Calculation.
You can set up parameters for the Cash Balance Calculation task that will automate the calculation
of balances every day.

The calculation will be done for the list of accounts matching the parameters selected.
You can use an offset in the From Date field in order to include any backdated activity. The offset
should be a negative number of days as we do not support the calculation in the future.
The set up and scheduling of the task is done as for any other task in CMM. See the WebSuite
System Administration Guide, and search for Task Scheduler.

9.3.2 Manual calculation
To access cash balance calculation, you need security by function access to FFG-0506 Calculate
Cash Balances.

WebSuite User Guide

157

9 Calculating cash balances
9.4 How calculation works

Calculation is normally automated through a task. For testing purposes, it can be useful to launch
the calculation manually. This is done via the menu option Banking-Calculate Cash Balances.

You can run the calculation for one or more accounts. The calculation starts on the From date and
stops at today. If no balances exist on the From date, the system tries to find a cash balance first
between the From Date and Today, then before the From Date. If it does not find one, it starts with
a zero opening balance on the From Date.
Calculation behavior is described in the next section.

9.4 How calculation works
Calculation is always performed up to today (the server date). If today is a Friday, the calculation
rolls forward the cash balance to the following Monday.
Manually entered initialization is never overwritten by the calculation.

Note: There is no cash balance history, so if you re-run the calculation on a date where cash
balances already exist, the system overwrites the existing cash balances.

158

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

9.4.1 Cash balance calculation flow
Check opening
balance on “From
Date”.
Proceed with calculation
starting with this opening
balance on the “From Date”.
Calculate between “From
Date” and “Today”.

Yes

Exist?

Check balance
from “From Date”.

Yes

Exist?
No

The balance is
manual, initialized on
DI.

The balance is
calculated.

Check opening
balance before
“From Date”.

Calculate from “From
Date” and “go over”
calculated balance.

If DI is between
“From Date” and
“Today”, start
calculations on DI.

If DI is after “Today”,
exit with error:
“Cannot calculate
balances, Manual
initialization exists in
the future.”

Yes

Exist?

DI = Date of Initialization

Whether manual or
calculated, use this
balance as a starting
point and calculate.

Set Opening
Balance at zero on
“From Date”. Type=
“Calculated”.

9.5 Cash balances in reports
If all activities have been performed correctly (for example: authorization, release, reconciliation,
adjustements) then cash balances should match the corresponding value date bank balances on
each account. In order to monitor cash balances and compare them to bank balances, cash balances
are available in the Bank Balance Analysis report.

WebSuite User Guide

159

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

When setting up the report criteria, select Balance Type. This provides a multiselection list with
different balance types, and Cash Balances is one of them. Selecting Cash Balances will display
the Cash Balance for Actual Balance Amount.

160

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

9.5.1 Example of a "list" report:

WebSuite User Guide

161

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

To compare cash balances to bank balances, you can select both Cash Balances and Value Date
Balances in the balance type list. If you are using a Pivot format report, make sure you include
Balance Type in the format otherwise the report will aggregate all balances.

162

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

Some standard criteria, format and reports have been created as template/examples:

Bank Value Date Vs Cash Balance displays the opening and closing value date bank balance and cash
balance for each day per account. This can be used to check that the two balances are the same.

Daily Closing Cash Balance displays closing cash balance balances per day.

WebSuite User Guide

163

9 Calculating cash balances
9.5 Cash balances in reports

164

Chapter 10

Managing static data

Static data (which are referred to as "core data" in the CMM user interface) change little over time
and must be available in Wallstreet Suite before you can capture and process activity. Examples of
static data include currencies, countries, regions, parties, bank accounts, and instruments.

10.1 Understanding static data
Static data are data that are central to your organization’s work in Wallstreet Suite, including
currencies, countries, parties, bank accounts, and instruments. They are "static" because they rarely
change once captured in the database.
If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, you create and maintain all static data
using the functions in the module’s Core Data menu group. Otherwise, you create and maintain
most static data in TRM’s Static Data Manager. The Static Data Manager then exports the static data
to the other modules as part of a standard integrated configuration:

You create and maintain the remaining static data that in CMM’s Core Data menu group.

Note: This chapter indicates which static data are created and maintained in TRM’s static data
manager and which are created and maintained in CMM’s Core Data menu group.

For more information on the Static Data Manager, see the TRM User Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

165

10.2 Managing basic static data
You must create basic static data before you create other static data such as parties, bank accounts,
and instruments. Basic static data include currencies, countries, and calendars.
The following table presents the basic static data for WebSuite:
Static data

CMM

TRM

ACM

CMM function

TRM editor

Currencies

Currency Editor

Countries

Country Editor

States

N/A

Regions

CMM Region
Editor

Industry Codes

CMM Industry
Code Editor

Payment
Methods

CMM Payment
Method Editor

Bank Holidays

Calendar Editor

Regions

Industries

Payment
methods

Non-business
days

Calendar Group
Editor

Employee
roles

Employee Roles

N/A

Custom
parameters

Parameter
Editor

N/A

10.2.1 Managing currencies
Currencies are essential to the capture and processing of activity in Wallstreet Suite.
Wallstreet Suite is installed with a default set of currencies. However, you may need to create
additional currencies, or edit or delete existing ones.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage currencies in CMM’s
Currencies function. Otherwise, manage currencies in TRM’s Currency Editor.

10.2.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing currencies:
Category

166

Tasks

Market data

Ensure the following market data are available:
•

Security

Interest rate categories (see Managing interest rate categories).

If you are managing currencies in TRM, ensure you have access to the Currency Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing currencies in CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0099 Currencies.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.1.2 Managing currencies in TRM
You can manage currencies in TRM using the Currency Editor. If you are using CMM, select fields in
the Currency Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s CURRENCIES table.
For information on the Currency Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User
Guide.

10.2.1.3 Creating currencies in CMM
To create a currency in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Currencies.
2. In the Currency Maintenance page, click New Entry.
3. In the Currency Code Maintenance page, create the currency.
4. Click Save.

10.2.1.4 Editing currencies in CMM
To edit a currency in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Currencies.
2. In the Currency Maintenance page, drill down on the currency.
3. In the Currency Code Maintenance page, edit the currency.
4. Click Save.

10.2.1.5 Deleting currencies in CMM
To delete a currency in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Currencies.
2. In the Currency Maintenance page, drill down on the currency.
3. In the Currency Code Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.2.2 Managing countries
Each party and bank account is assigned a country. This assignment is important to several
processes in Wallstreet Suite, including CMM’s transaction routing.
Wallstreet Suite is installed with a default set of countries. However, you may need to create
additional countries, or edit or delete existing ones.

WebSuite User Guide

167

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage countries in CMM’s
Countries function. Otherwise, manage countries in TRM’s Country Editor.

10.2.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing countries:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Currencies (see Managing currencies).

If you are managing countries in TRM, ensure you have access to the Country Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing countries in CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0097 Countries.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.2.2 Managing countries in TRM
You can manage countries in TRM using the Country Editor. If your organization is using CMM, select
fields in the Country Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s COUNTRIES table.
For information on the Country Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User Guide.

10.2.2.3 Creating countries in CMM
To create a country in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Countries.
2. In the Country Codes page, click New Entry.
3. In the Country Code Maintenance page, create the country.
4. Click Save.

10.2.2.4 Editing countries in CMM
To edit a country in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Countries.
2. In the Country Codes page, drill down on the country.
3. In the Country Code Maintenance page, edit the country.
4. Click Save.

10.2.2.5 Deleting countries in CMM
To delete a country in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Countries.
2. In the Country Codes page, drill down on the country.
3. In the Country Code Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

168

10.2.3 Managing states
The term "state" applies to states, provinces, cantons, and other divisions of countries. CMM refers
to states in the addresses of parties and bank accounts.

10.2.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing states:
Category
Security

Tasks
Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0077 States.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.3.2 Creating states
To create a state:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - States.
2. In the State Maintenance page, click New Entry.
3. In the State Code Maintenance page, create the state.
4. Click Save.

10.2.3.3 Editing states
To edit a state:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - States.
2. In the State Maintenance page, drill down on the state.
3. In the State Code Maintenance page, edit the state.
4. Click Save.

10.2.3.4 Deleting states
To delete a state:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - States.
2. In the State Maintenance page, drill down on the state.
3. In the State Code Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.2.4 Managing regions
Regions group your organization’s parties and are dependent on its structure. You can create
regions based on geographical location, currency, or other factors as required.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage regions in CMM’s
Regions function. Otherwise, manage regions in TRM’s CMM Region Editor.

WebSuite User Guide

169

10.2.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing regions:
Category
Security

Tasks
If you are managing regions in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM Region Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing regions in CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0121 Regions.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.4.2 Managing regions in TRM
You can manage regions in TRM using the CMM Region Editor. Select fields in the CMM Region Editor
are mapped to fields in CMM’s REGIONS table.
For information on the CMM Region Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User
Guide.

10.2.4.3 Creating regions in CMM
To create a region in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Regions.
2. Click Search.
3. In the Regions List page, click New Entry.
4. In the Regions Maintenance page, create the region.
5. Click Save.

10.2.4.4 Editing regions in CMM
To edit a region in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Regions.
2. In the Regions - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Regions List page, drill down on the region.
5. In the Regions Maintenance page, edit the region.
6. Click Save.

10.2.4.5 Deleting regions in CMM
To delete a region in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Regions.
2. In the Regions - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Regions List page, drill down on the region.
5. In the Regions Maintenance page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

170

10.2.5 Managing industries
You can maintain your organization’s and counterparties’ industries in Wallstreet Suite and then
assign those industries to individual parties for information purposes.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage industries in CMM’s
Industry Codes function. Otherwise, manage industries in TRM’s CMM Industry Code
Editor.

10.2.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing industries:
Category

Tasks

Security

If you are managing industries in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM Industry Code
Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing industries in CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0040 Industry Codes.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.5.2 Managing industries in TRM
You can manage industries in TRM using the CMM Industry Code Editor. Select fields in the CMM
Industry Code Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s INDUSTRYCODES table.
For information on the CMM Industry Code Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM
User Guide.

10.2.5.3 Creating industries in CMM
To create an industry in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Industry Codes.
2. In the Industry Code Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
3. In the Industry Code Maintenance [editor] page, create the industry.
4. Click Save.

10.2.5.4 Editing industries in CMM
To edit an industry in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Industry Codes.
2. In the Industry Code Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the industry.
3. In the Industry Code Maintenance [editor] page, edit the industry.
4. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

171

10.2.5.5 Deleting industries in CMM
To delete an industry in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Industry Codes.
2. In the Industry Code Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the industry.
3. In the Industry Code Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.2.6 Managing payment methods
Payment methods define the methods by which transactions are paid (for example, EFT, wire
transfer, or check).

10.2.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing payment methods:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0307 Payment Method Maintenance.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

If your organization is using CMM as part of Wallstreet Suite, ensure you have access to the
CMM Payment Method Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.

10.2.6.2 Creating, editing, and deleting payment methods
If your organization is using CMM as part of Wallstreet Suite, you can create, edit, and delete
payment methods in TRM’s CMM Payment Method Editor. Select fields in the CMM Payment Method
Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s PAYMENTMETHODS table.
For information on the CMM Payment Method Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the
TRM User Guide.

10.2.6.3 Mapping payment methods to processes
To map payment methods to processes:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Payment Methods.
2. In the Process Selection page, drill down on the appropriate process.
3. In the Payment Method Maintenance page, select the appropriate payment methods’ Displayable
checkboxes.
4. In each selected payment method’s List Order field, enter the order in which you want the
payment method to display in the process’s lists.
Ensure each selected payment method has a number and that you do not use the same number
more than once.
5. Click Save.

10.2.7 Managing non-business days
Non-business days include weekends and holidays. Maintaining these days in Wallstreet Suiteis
important for the scheduling of activity.

172

Non-business days are maintained separately in CMM, TRM, and ACM:
•

For CMM, Saturdays and Sundays are assumed to be non-business days. You can define other non-business
days (in other words, holidays) on a country-by-country basis in the Bank Holidays function.

•

For TRM and ACM, you define sets of non-business days in a calendar in the Calendar Editor. You assign
calendars to currencies, instruments, and any other static data for which dates need be computed. (If you
need to assign multiple calendars to an instrument, you can do so through calendar groups.)

10.2.7.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing non-business days:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Countries (see Managing countries).

If your organization is using CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0005 Bank Holidays.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

If your organization is using TRM and ACM, ensure you have access to the Calendar Editor
and Calendar Group Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.

10.2.7.2 Creating CMM holidays
To create a CMM holiday:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Holidays.
2. Click Search.
3. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
4. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [editor] page, create the CMM holiday.
5. Click Save.

10.2.7.3 Editing CMM holidays
To edit a CMM holiday:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Holidays.
2. In the Bank Holiday - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the CMM holiday.
5. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [editor] page, edit the CMM holiday.
6. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

173

10.2.7.4 Deleting CMM holidays
To delete a CMM holiday:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Holidays.
2. In the Bank Holiday - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the CMM holiday.
5. In the Bank Holidays Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.2.7.5 Managing TRM calendars and calendar groups
You can manage calendars and calendar groups in TRM’s Calendar Editor and Calendar Group Editor.
For information on the Calendar Editor and Calendar Group Editor, see the TRM User Guide.

10.2.8 Managing employee roles
Roles classify employees’ responsibilities for or involvement in cash management in your
organization. The purpose of assigning a role to an employee is to facilitate the grouping and
reporting of employees.
The following are examples of employee roles:

•

Cash Manager

•

Trader

•

Chief Financial Officer.

Note: Employee roles are also referred to as "jobs".

10.2.8.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing employee roles:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0106 Roles.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.2.8.2 Creating employee roles
To create an employee role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Employee Roles.
2. In the Employee Role List page, click New Entry.
3. In the Employee Role Maintenance page, create the employee role.
4. Click Save.

174

10.2.8.3 Editing employee roles
To edit an employee role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Employee Roles.
2. In the Employee Role List page, drill down on the employee role.
3. In the Employee Role Maintenance page, edit the employee role.
4. Click Save.

10.2.8.4 Deleting employee roles
To delete an employee role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Employee Roles.
2. In the Employee Role List page, drill down on the employee role.
3. In the Employee Role Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.2.9 Managing custom parameters
The Parameter Editor function allows you to define custom forecast and bank transaction
parameters. You can define up to 10 custom parameters for forecasts and up to 20 customer
parameters for bank transactions.

Note: Customer parameters are also referred to as "custom attributes".
By default, cash records can have up to 10 custom attributes. These attributes are defined in the
CASHRECORDCONTENTTYPE table, and can be edited. For more information, see the WebSuite System
Admin Guide and search for Cash record Additional Attributes.

Note: There is no restriction on the number of attributes configured but only the first 20 can be
passed to accounting entries in ACM.

10.2.9.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing custom parameters:
Category
Security

Tasks
Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0355 Parameter Editor.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

175

10.2.9.2 Defining forecast custom parameters
To define a forecast custom parameter:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Parameter Editor.
2. In the Parameter Editor - Criteria Selection page, select Cash Flow Forecast in the Parameter Type
list.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Cash Flow Forecast Parameters [list] page, drill down on the forecast custom parameter.
5. In the Cash Flow Forecast Parameters [editor] page, define the forecast custom parameter.
6. Click Save.

10.2.9.3 Defining bank transaction custom parameters
To define a bank transaction custom parameter:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Parameter Editor.
2. In the Parameter Editor - Criteria Selection page, select Bank Transaction in the Parameter Type
list.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Transaction Parameters [list] page, drill down on the bank transaction custom
parameter.
5. In the Bank Transaction Parameters [editor] page, define the bank transaction custom
parameter.
6. Click Save.

10.2.9.4 Changing the order of custom parameters
To change the order of custom parameters:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Parameter Editor.
2. In the Parameter Editor - Criteria Selection page, select Bank Transaction or Cash Flow
Forecast in the Parameter Type list.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Transaction Parameters [list] or Cash Flow Forecast Parameters [list] page:

–

To move a custom parameter up, click

in its row.

–

To move a custom parameter down, click

in its row.

10.3 Managing parties
Managing parties in Wallstreet Suite allows you to track activity against those parties.
In TRM and ACM, parties are referred to as "clients".
In CMM, parties are referred to as "entities" and "counterparties":

•

Entities (including in-house banks) are companies or divisions of companies internal to your
organization

•

Counterparties are companies or divisions of companies external to your organization.

176

Note: The term "counterparty" does not always refer to an external party in CMM. In an

intercompany transaction, for example, an entity can function as a counterparty. However,
in static data management, the term "counterparty" always refers to an external party.

The following table presents the party static data for WebSuite:
Static data

CMM

TRM

ACM

CMM function

TRM editor

Add Entity

Client Editor

Entities (and related data)
Entities

Edit Entity
In-house
banks

Add In-House
Bank

Client Editor

Edit In-House
Bank
Business
segments

Business
Segments

N/A

AP and AR
mappings

Entity ID
Mapping for AP
& AR

N/A

Counterpart
y types

Counterparty
Types

N/A

Counterpart
ies

Add
Counterparty

Client Editor

Counterparties (and related data)

Edit
Counterparty
Counterpart
y contacts

Counterparty
Contacts

Client Editor

Party roles

Party Roles

N/A

Party
relationships

Party
Relationships

N/A

10.3.1 Managing entities (and related data)
An entity is a company or division of a company internal to your organization.

WebSuite User Guide

177

In CMM, you create an entity in the Add Entity or Edit Entity function or import it using the Task
Scheduler function. In TRM, you create an entity in the Client Editor with the following roles:
Entity type

Role

In-house bank

ACCOUNT-OWNER

Other type of entity

PORTFOLIO-OWNER

10.3.1.1 Managing entities
An entity is a company or division in your organization. You use entities to record, track, and report
on activity in Wallstreet Suite.
During implementation, you and Wallstreet work together to create entities. However, you may
need to create new entities, or edit or delete existing ones after implementation to reflect changes in
your organization.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage entities in CMM’s Add
Entity and Edit Entity functions. Otherwise, manage entities in TRM’s Client Editor.

Note: The entity name cannot contain the ’ character.
10.3.1.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing entities:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Regions (see Managing regions)

•

Industries (see Managing industries).

If you are managing entities in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing entities in CMM, ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0167 Edit Entity

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.1.2 Managing entities in TRM
You can manage entities in TRM using the Client Editor. If you are using CMM, select fields in the
Client Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s PARTIES table.
For information on the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User Guide.

178

Note: After you have created an entity, you or another user must assign it to the appropriate

profiles so that you can access it in CMM. For more information, see the WebSuite System
Admin Guide.

10.3.1.2.1 Editing entities in CMM
To edit an entity in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit Entity.
2. In the Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Entity List page, drill down on the entity.
5. In the Entity Maintenance page, edit the entity.
6. Click More Attributes.
7. Continue to edit the entity:
8. Do the following:

–

To convert the entity to an in-house bank, click Save As In-House Bank.
For more information on in-house banks, see Managing in-house banks.

–

To define how the entity interacts with specific functions in CMM:
a. Click Modify Entity Attributes.
b. In the Attributes Maintenance page, define how the entity interacts with specific
functions in CMM.
The controls vary depending on your organization’s installation. For more information,
contact Wallstreet.
c.

Click Save.

d. Click Return.

–

To add party roles to or remove party roles from the entity:
a. Click Assign Party Role.
b. Follow the instructions in Managing party roles.

9. Click Save.

10.3.1.2.2 Deleting entities in CMM
To delete an entity in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit Entity.
2. In the Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Entity List page, drill down on the entity.
5. In the Entity Maintenance page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.1.3 Managing in-house banks
An in-house bank is a virtual bank owned and operated by your organization for the benefit of itself
and its entities. These in-house banks provide their clients with many of the services offered by
external banks as well as other services unique to internal banking.

WebSuite User Guide

179

During implementation, you and Wallstreet work together to create in-house banks. However, you
may need to create new in-house banks, or edit or delete existing ones after implementation to
reflect changes in your organization.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage in-house banks in

CMM’s Add In-House Bank and Edit In-House Bank functions. Otherwise, manage in-house
banks in TRM’s Client Editor.

10.3.1.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing in-house banks:
Category
Static data

Security

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Regions (see Managing regions)

•

Industries (see Managing industries).

If you are managing in-house banks in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing in-house banks in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
function:
•

FG-0354 Edit IHB.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.1.4 Managing in-house banks in TRM
You can manage in-house banks in TRM using the Client Editor. If you are using CMM, select fields in
the Client Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s PARTIES table.
For information on the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User Guide.

Note: After you have created an in-house bank, you or another user must assign it to the

appropriate profiles so that you can access it in CMM. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.

180

10.3.1.4.1 Editing in-house banks in CMM
To edit an in-house bank in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit In-House Bank.
2. In the In-House Bank List page, drill down on the in-house bank.
3. In the In-House Bank Maintenance page, edit the in-house bank.
4. Click More Attributes.
5. Continue to edit the in-house bank.
6. Do the following:

–

To define how the in-house bank interacts with specific functions in CMM:
a. Click Modify Entity Attributes.
b. In the Attributes Maintenance page, define how the in-house bank interacts with
specific functions in CMM.
The controls vary depending on your organization’s installation. For more information,
contact Wallstreet.
c.

Click Save.

d. Click Return.

–

To add party roles to or remove party roles from the entity:
a. Click Assign Party Role.
b. Follow the instructions in Managing party roles.

7. Click Save.

10.3.1.4.2 Deleting in-house banks in CMM
To delete an in-house bank in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit In-House Bank.
2. In the In-House Bank List page, drill down on the in-house bank.
3. In the In-House Bank Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.1.5 Managing business segments
Business segments allow you to classify and group your organization’s entities by industry,
operation, or other category.

10.3.1.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing business segments:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Entities (see Managing entities).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0367 Maintain Business Segments.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

181

10.3.1.5.2 Creating business segments
To create a business segment:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Business Segments.
2. In the Business Segment Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
3. In the Business Segment Maintenance [editor] page, create the business segment.
4. Click Save.

10.3.1.5.3 Editing business segments
To edit a business segment:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Business Segments.
2. In the Business Segment Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the business segment.
3. In the Business Segment Maintenance [editor] page, edit the business segment.
4. Click Save.

10.3.1.5.4 Deleting business segments
To delete a business segment:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Business Segments.
2. In the Business Segment Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the business segment.
3. In the Business Segment Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.1.5.5 Mapping entities to business segments
To map entities to a business segment:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Business Segments.
2. In the Business Segment Maintenance [list] page, click Assign Entities in the business segment’s
row.
3. In the Assign Entities to Business Segment page, assign entities to the business segment.

10.3.1.6 Managing accounts payable and receivable mappings
Accounts payable and receivable mappings determine how monies are paid and received from
accounts payable and receivable systems for selected entities. You must use exact accounts payable
and receivable system names to ensure the accurate and efficient transfer of funds to and from
external accounting systems.

10.3.1.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing accounts payable and receivable mappings:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

182

Entities (see Managing entities).

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0055 Entity ID Mapping for AP and AR Systems.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.1.6.2 Managing accounts payable and receivable mappings
To manage accounts payable and receivable mappings:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity ID Mapping for AP & AR.
2. In the Entity Codes Mapping Table Maintenance page, click Payables System or Receivables System in
the appropriate entity’s row.
3. In the Map Company Codes to Entities page, enter the entity’s accounts payable or receivable
system in each entity’s in External System field.
4. Click Save.

10.3.2 Managing counterparties (and related data)
Counterparties are suppliers, customers, banks, and financial institutions that entities do business
with but that are external to your organization.

Note: As noted at the beginning of this chapter, the term "counterparty" can refer to both internal
parties and external parties outside of static data management.

In CMM, you create a counterparty in the Add Counterparty or Edit Counterparty function or import
it using the Task Scheduler function. In TRM, you create an counterparty in the Client Editor with the
following roles:
Counterparty type

Role

Bank

BANK

Other type of counterparty

Any role except PORTFOLIO-OWNER, ACCOUNT-HOLDER, or BANK.

10.3.2.1 Managing counterparty types
Counterparty types classify companies with which your organization conducts commercial or
financial transactions. Logical groups (for example, governments, banks, and corporations) are
primarily for reporting purposes. In some cases, further classification by industry (for example, oil
and gas, and automotive) may be required. When defining counterparty types, know how your
organization classifies the companies with which it does business.
Most counterparty types are for informational purposes only; however, some counterparty types
drive functionality. For example, the BANK counterparty type defines which counterparties function
as banks, and the REGULATORY counterparty type defines which counterparties function as central
banks (or "regulatory authorities").

10.3.2.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing counterparty types:
Category

Tasks

WebSuite User Guide

183

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0098 Counterparty Types.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.2.1.2 Creating counterparty types
To create a counterparty type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Types.
2. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
3. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [editor] page, create the counterparty type.
4. Click Save.

10.3.2.1.3 Editing counterparty types
To edit a counterparty type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Types.
2. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the counterparty type.
3. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [editor] page, edit the counterparty type.
4. Click Save.

10.3.2.1.4 Deleting counterparty types
To delete a counterparty type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Types.
2. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the counterparty type.
3. In the Counterparty Type Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.2.2 Managing counterparties
Counterparties are suppliers, customers, banks, and financial institutions that entities do business
with but that are external to your organization.
During implementation, you and Wallstreet work together to create counterparties. However, you
may need to create new counterparties, or edit or delete existing ones after implementation to
reflect changes in your organization.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage counterparties in
CMM’s Add Counterparty and Edit Counterparty functions. Otherwise, manage
counterparties in TRM’s Client Editor.

10.3.2.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing counterparties:
Category

184

Tasks

Static data

Security

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Regions (see Managing regions)

•

Industries (see Managing industries)

•

Counterparty types (see Managing counterparty types).

If you are managing counterparties in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing counterparties in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
functions:
•

FG-0170 Edit Counterparty

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.2.3 Managing counterparties in TRM
You can manage counterparties in TRM using the Client Editor. If you are using CMM, select fields in
the Client Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s PARTIES table.
For information on the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the TRM User Guide.

Note: After you have created a counterparty, you or another user must assign it to the

appropriate profiles so that you can access it in CMM. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.2.3.1 Editing counterparties
To edit a counterparty:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Edit Counterparty.
2. In the Counterparty Search - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Counterparty List page, drill down on the counterparty.
5. In the Counterparty Maintenance page, edit the counterparty.
6. Click More Attributes.
7. Continue to edit the counterparty.
8. Do the following:

–

To define how the counterparty interacts with specific functions in CMM:
a. Click Modify Counterparty Attributes.
b. In the Attributes Maintenance page, define how the counterparty interacts with specific
functions in CMM.

WebSuite User Guide

185

The controls vary depending on your organization’s installation. For more information,
contact Wallstreet.
c.

Click Save.

d. Click Return.

–

To add party roles to or remove party roles from the counterparty:
a. Click Assign Party Role.
b. Follow the instructions in Managing party roles.

9. Click Save.

10.3.2.3.2 Deleting counterparties in CMM
To delete a counterparty in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Edit Counterparty.
2. In the Counterparty Search - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Counterparty List page, drill down on the counterparty.
5. In the Counterparty Maintenance page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.2.4 Managing counterparty contacts
A counterparty contact is the primary contact person for a counterparty. When dealing with a large
corporation or bank, you can maintain multiple contacts with different roles.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage counterparty contacts
in CMM’s Counterparty Contacts function. Otherwise, manage counterparty contacts in the
Contacts page of TRM’s Client Editor.

10.3.2.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing counterparty contacts:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Employee roles (see Managing employee roles)

•

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties).

If you are managing counterparty contacts in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client
Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing counterparty contacts in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
function:
•

FG-0112 Counterparty Contacts.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.2.5 Managing counterparty contacts in TRM
You can manage counterparty contacts in TRM using the Contacts page of the Client Editor. If you
are using CMM, select fields in the Contacts page are mapped to fields in CMM’s CPTYCONTACTS table.

186

For information on the Contacts page of the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see
the TRM User Guide.

10.3.2.5.1 Creating counterparty contacts in CMM
To create a counterparty contact in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Contacts.
2. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
3. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [editor] page, create the counterparty contact.
4. Click Save.

10.3.2.5.2 Editing counterparty contacts in CMM
To edit a counterparty contact in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Contacts.
2. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the counterparty contact.
3. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [editor] page, edit the counterparty contact.
4. Click Save.

10.3.2.5.3 Deleting counterparty contacts in CMM
To delete a counterparty contact in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Contacts.
2. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the counterparty contact.
3. In the Counterparty Contacts Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.3 Managing party roles
Party roles define entities’ and counterparties’ responsibilities. In particular, some party roles define
entities’ and counterparties’ responsibilities in transaction processing.
CMMis installed with the following party roles:
ID

Description

TradingParty

Entities and counterparties that can act as parties in deals

TradingCounterparty

Entities and counterparties that can act as counterparties in deals

Safekeeper

Entities and counterparties that can act as safekeepers

Guarantor

Entities and counterparties that can act as guarantors

Issuer

Entities and counterparties that can act as issuers

Trustee

Entities and counterparties that can act as trustees

You can create user-defined party roles in addition to these system-defined ones. You can delete
user-defined party roles; however, you cannot delete system-defined party roles.

WebSuite User Guide

187

10.3.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing party roles:
Category
Static data

Security

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

In-house banks (see Managing in-house banks)

•

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0061 Entity and Counterparty Roles

•

FG-0167 Edit Entity

•

FG-0170 Edit Counterparty

•

FG-0354 Edit IHB.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.3.2 Creating party roles
To create a party role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Roles.
2. In the Party Roles List page, click New Entry.
3. In the Party Roles Maintenance page, create the party role.
4. Click Save.

10.3.3.3 Editing party roles
To edit a party role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Roles.
2. In the Party Roles List page, drill down on the party role.
3. In the Party Roles Maintenance page, edit the party role.
4. Click Save.

10.3.3.4 Deleting party roles
To delete a party role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Roles.
2. In the Party Roles List page, drill down on the party role.
3. In the Party Roles Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

188

10.3.3.5 Adding parties to party roles
To add parties to a party role:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Roles.
2. In the Party Roles List page, drill down on the party role.
3. In the Party Roles Maintenance page, click Party Assignment.
4. In the Party Assignment List page, click Assign New Party.
5. In the Party - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
6. Click Search.
7. In the Available Party List page, select the parties’ Assigned checkboxes.
To review a party before assigning it to the party role, drill down on it.
8. Click Save.

10.3.3.6 Removing parties from party roles
To remove parties from party roles:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Roles.
2. In the Party Roles List page, drill down on the party role.
3. In the Party Roles Maintenance page, click Party Assignment.
4. In the Party Assignment List page, clear the parties’ Assigned checkboxes.
5. Click Save.

10.3.3.7 Adding party roles to a party
To add party roles to a party:
1. Do one of the following:

–

To add party roles to an entity:
a. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit Entity.
b. In the Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
c.

–

Click Search.

To add party roles to a counterparty:
a. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Edit Counterparty.
b. In the Counterparty Search - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
c.

–

Click Search.

To add party roles to an in-house bank, select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit In-House Bank.

2. In the Entity List, Counterparty List, or In-House Bank List page, drill down on the party.
3. In the Entity Maintenance, Counterparty Maintenance, or In-House Bank Maintenance page, click
Assign Party Role.
4. In the Party Role Assignments List page, select the party roles’ Assigned checkboxes in the In the
Available Roles table.
5. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

189

10.3.3.8 Removing party roles from parties
To remove party roles from a party:
1. Do one of the following:

–

To remove party roles from an entity:
a. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit Entity.
b. In the Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
c.

–

Click Search.

To remove party roles from a counterparty:
a. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Edit Counterparty.
b. In the Counterparty Search - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
c.

–

Click Search.

To remove party roles from an in-house bank, select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Edit In-House Bank.

2. In the Entity List, Counterparty List, or In-House Bank List page, drill down on the party.
3. In the Entity Maintenance, Counterparty Maintenance, or In-House Bank Maintenance page, click
Assign Party Role.
4. In the Party Role Assignments List page, clear the party roles’ Assigned checkboxes in the In the
Assigned Roles table.
5. Click Save.

10.3.4 Managing party relationships
Party relationships define the different hierarchical relationships between parties. The following
relationship categories are available:

•

Entity

•

Counterparty

•

Bank

•

Regulatory authority.

10.3.4.1 Managing entity relationships
An entity can own or operate other entities in your organization. When one entity owns another
entity, the owner entity is referred to as the "parent" and the owned entity is referred to as the
"child". The entity relationship functionality allows you to capture the relationships between parent
and child entities.
Entity relationships are based on relationship types, which you can also manage through this
functionality.

10.3.4.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing entity relationships:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

190

Entities (see Managing entities).

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0056 Entity Relationship Maintenance

•

Party Relationships.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.4.1.2 Creating relationship types
To create a relationship type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Relationships.
Alternatively, you can select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships, select Entity in the
Relationship Type list, and then click Continue.
2. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance [list] page, click Entity Relationship Types Maintenance.
3. In the Entity Relationship Types Maintenance page, click New Entry.
4. In the Entity Relationship Type Maintenance page, create the relationship type.
5. Click Save.

10.3.4.1.3 Editing relationship types
To edit a relationship type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Relationships.
Alternatively, you can select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships, select Entity in the
Relationship Type list, and then click Continue.
2. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance [list] page, click Entity Relationship Types Maintenance.
3. In the Entity Relationship Types Maintenance page, drill down on the relationship type.
4. In the Entity Relationship Type Maintenance page, edit the relationship type.
5. Click Save.

10.3.4.1.4 Deleting relationship types
To delete a relationship type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Relationships.
Alternatively, you can select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships, select Entity in the
Relationship Type list, and then click Continue.
2. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance [list] page, click Entity Relationship Types Maintenance.
3. In the Entity Relationship Types Maintenance page, drill down on the relationship type.
4. In the Entity Relationship Type Maintenance page, click Delete.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.3.4.1.5 Managing entity relationships
To manage entity relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Relationships.
Alternatively, you can select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships, select Entity in the
Relationship Type list, and then click Continue.
2. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the appropriate entity.
If the appropriate entity is not available, click New Entry to create it.

WebSuite User Guide

191

For information on creating entities, see Managing entities.
3. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance - Criteria Selection page, select the appropriate
relationship type in the Entity Relationship Type list.
If the appropriate relationship type is not available, click New Type to create it.
4. Click Show Relationship.
5. In the Entity Relationship Maintenance [editor] page, select the entity’s parents’ checkboxes.
6. Enter the report weightings (as a percentage) in the entity’s parents’ Report Weighting Percentage
fields.
7. Select the entity’s children’s checkboxes.
Do not select the same entity as a parent and a child.
8. Click Save.

10.3.4.2 Managing counterparty relationships
Like entities, counterparties can have hierarchical relationships.

10.3.4.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing counterparty relationships:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0057 Party Relationship Maintenance.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.4.2.2 Managing counterparty relationships
To manage counterparty relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships.
2. In the Relationship Maintenance - Criteria Selection page, select Counterparty in the Relationship
Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Counterparty Relationship Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the appropriate
counterparty.
If the appropriate counterparty is not available, click New Entry to create it.
For information on creating counterparties, see Managing counterparties.
5. In the Counterparty Relationship Maintenance [editor] page, select the counterparty’s parents’
checkboxes.
6. Select the counterparty’s children’s checkboxes.
Do not select the same counterparty as a parent and a child.
7. Click Save.

192

10.3.4.3 Managing bank relationships
Banks, like entities and counterparties, can have hierarchical relationships. Bank hierarchies are
needed for processing transaction files. The top bank in the hierarchy is designated as the aggregate
bank. During transaction processing, all payments on a bank account from banks in the established
hierarchy filter through the aggregate bank.

10.3.4.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing bank relationships:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

In-house banks (see Managing in-house banks)

•

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0057 Party Relationship Maintenance.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.4.3.2 Managing bank relationships
To manage bank relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships.
2. In the Relationship Maintenance - Criteria Selection page, select Banks in the Relationship Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Bank Relationship Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the appropriate bank.
If the appropriate bank is not available, click New Entry to create it.
For information on creating banks, see Managing counterparties.
5. In the Bank Relationship Maintenance [editor] page, select the bank’s parents’ checkboxes.
6. Select the bank’s children’s checkboxes.
Do not select the same bank as a parent and a child.
7. Click Save.

10.3.4.4 Managing regulatory authority relationships
You can configure relationships for central bank (or "regulatory authority") reporting purposes. In
CMM, a central bank is a counterparty with the REGULATORY type.

10.3.4.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing regulatory authority relationships:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Central banks (see Managing counterparties).

WebSuite User Guide

193

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0057 Party Relationship Maintenance.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and central banks for which you want to
configure regulatory authority relationships.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.3.4.4.2 Managing regulatory authority relationships
To manage regulatory authority relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Party Relationships.
2. In the Relationship Maintenance - Criteria Selection page, select Regulatory Authorities in
the Relationship Type list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Regulatory Relationships Maintenance page, select the appropriate regulatory authority in
the Regulatory Authority list.
5. Click Continue.
6. In the Regulatory Authority Relationships page, assign entities to the regulatory authority.

10.4 Managing bank accounts
Bank accounts can be internal, external, or virtual:
Type

Bank

Client

Status

Internal

In-house

Entity

Open or Closed

External

Entity or counterparty

Open or Closed

Virtual

In-house or
external

Entity

Hierarchy only

Note: You can utilize virtual bank accounts in bank account relationships where you want to use
the bank account as a parent but do not want users to process activity in it. For more
information on virtual bank accounts, see Managing bank account relationships.

Bank accounts are relevant to all three modules and are the foundation for capturing, processing,
and reporting on transactions in CMM.
The following table presents the bank account static data for WebSuite:
Static data

Bank account
types

194

CMM

TRM

ACM

CMM function

TRM editor

Bank Account
Types

N/A

Entity bank
accounts

Entity Bank
Accounts

Client Editor

Counterparty
bank accounts

Counterparty
Bank Accounts

Client Editor

Bank Account
Relationships

Bank account
relationships

Bank Account
Group Mapping

Bank account
groups

CMM
Relationship
Type Editor
CMM Bank
Account Group
Editor

Settlement
Groups

N/A

People and
signatories

People

Client Editor

Signatory
groups

Signatories

N/A

Signatory
rules

Signatories

N/A

Settlement
groups

Signatories (and related data)

10.4.1 Managing bank account types
Bank account types can define a bank account’s status (for example, Current, Closed, and so on)
or function (General, Disbursement, and so on).
Bank Account Types are configured in TRM Bank Account Type Editor. You can monitor Bank Account
Type in Websuite: Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Types.

10.4.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing bank account types:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0001 Bank Account Types.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

195

10.4.1.2 Creating bank account types
To create a bank account type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Types.
2. In the Bank Account Types page, click New Entry.
3. In the Bank Account Type Maintenance page, create the bank account type.
4. Click Save.

10.4.1.3 Editing bank account types
To edit a bank account type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Types.
2. In the Bank Account Types page, drill down on the bank account type.
3. In the Bank Account Type Maintenance page, edit the bank account type.
4. Click Save.

10.4.1.4 Deleting bank account types
To delete a bank account type:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Types.
2. In the Bank Account Types page, drill down on the bank account type.
3. In the Bank Account Type Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.2 Managing entity bank accounts
Entity bank accounts are accounts entities hold with banks (either in-house or external).
During implementation, you and Wallstreet work together to create entity bank accounts. However,
you may need to create new entity bank accounts, or edit or delete existing ones after
implementation to reflect changes in your organization.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage entity bank accounts
in CMM’s Entity Bank Accounts function. Otherwise, manage entity bank accounts in the
Accounts page of TRM’s Client Editor.

10.4.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing entity bank accounts:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters have been set:
•

Allow Bank Accounts At Multiple IHBs

•

Allow Bank Accounts Outside Functional Currency.

For more information, see

196

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Static data

Security

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Banks (see Managing in-house banks and Managing counterparties)

•

Bank account types (see Managing bank account types).

If you are managing entity bank accounts in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client
Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing entity bank accounts in CMM, ensure you have access to the
following functions:
•

FG-0130 Entity Bank Accounts

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.2.2 Managing entity bank accounts in TRM
You can manage entity bank accounts in TRM using the Accounts page of the Client Editor. If you are
using CMM, select fields in the Accounts page are mapped to fields in CMM’s BANKACCOUNTS table.
For information on the Accounts page of the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see
the TRM User Guide.

Note: After you have created an entity bank account, you or another user must assign it to the
appropriate profiles so that you can access it in CMM. For more information, see the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

197

10.4.2.2.1 Account status
In CMM, a bank account’s Account status can have one of the following values: Open, Closed, or
Hierarchy only. The Account status is set in the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page. This is how it
works:

•

Open
In the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page, if the Hierarchy Only switch is off, and the No CMM
Replication switch is off, then the Account status in CMM is Open.

•

Closed
Switch on the No CMM Replication switch in the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page. If there is a
position on this account, then ithe account status field in CMM will be updated with the value
Closed.
Also, if the account holds no position in TRM, and no cash records in CMM are held on this
account, then it is possible to delete the account in TRM and CMM.

•

Hierarchy only
Switch on the Hierarchy Only switch in the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page.
Use this if the account is used only for hierarchies in CMM: the bank account is used as a parent
in bank account relationships but is not used in activity processing.

10.4.2.3 Creating entity bank accounts in CMM
To create an entity bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Bank Accounts.
2. Click Search.
3. In the Entity Bank Accounts List page, click New Entry.
4. In the Entity Bank Accounts Maintenance page, create the entity bank account.
5. Click Save.
As an alternative to creating entity bank accounts in CMM, you can create them in Microsoft Excel
using the static and market data import template and then import them into the module. This
approach is more efficient—particularly if you are creating a large number of entity bank accounts.

Note: While you can import internal bank accounts, Wallstreet recommends you enter them

manually. If you do import internal bank accounts, you must set the party type to
"External" before the import and then change it to "Internal" in CMM after the import.

After downloading the template, do the following:
1. Enter the entity bank accounts’ data in the appropriate worksheet.
The template validates the information you enter to ensure it will import correctly.
2. Copy and paste the contents of the worksheet (excluding the header row) to a new workbook.
3. Save the new workbook as a tab-delimited text file.
4. Place the text file in the following folder on the CMM server:
…\[CMM folder]\Imports\BankAcct\
5. Schedule the Bank Accounts Import task in the Task Scheduler function.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

198

10.4.2.4 Editing entity bank accounts in CMM
To edit an entity bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Bank Accounts.
2. In the Entity Bank Accounts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Entity Bank Accounts List page, drill down on the entity bank account.
5. In the Entity Bank Accounts Maintenance page, edit the entity bank account.
6. Do the following:

–

To specify if the entity bank account can be used in deal settlement for select instrument
categories:
a. Click Modify Settlement Bank Account Assignments.
b. In the Settlement Assignments for Deals page:

–

To allow the entity bank account to be used in payment deal settlements for the
instrument category, select the instrument category’s Payment checkbox.

–

To allow the entity bank account to be used in receipt deal settlements for the
instrument category, select the instrument category’s Receipt checkbox.

Click Save.

To assign signatory groups and rules to the entity bank account:
a. Click Edit Rules and Groups.
b. Follow the instructions in Managing signatory groups and Managing signatory rules.

–

To assign interest, fee, and tax calculations to the entity bank account:
a. Click Assign Calculations.
b. Follow the instructions in the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

–

To define how the entity bank account interacts with specific functions in CMM:
a. Click Edit Additional Attributes.
b. In the Additional Bank Account Attributes page, define how the entity bank account
interacts with specific functions in CMM.

WebSuite User Guide

199

The controls vary depending on your organization’s installation. For more information,
contact Wallstreet.
c.

–

Click Save.

To specify if the entity bank account can be used in on-behalf-of transactions:
a. Click Define Sharing Definition.
b. In the Bank Account Sharing Maintenance page, select an appropriate value in the Sharing
Definition list:

–

Note Shared

–

Shared

–

Shared With Credit.

Click Save.

To define a settlement rule for the entity bank account:
a. Click Edit IHB Account Settlement Rule.
b. Follow the instructions in the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

–

To assign intermediary and correspondent banks to the entity bank account:
a. Click Edit Intermediary and Correspondent Bank.
This link only displays if you are editing an external bank account.
b. In the Intermediary and Correspondent Bank page, assign intermediary and
correspondent banks to the counterparty bank account.
c.

Click Save.

d. Click Return.

–

To assign a reconciliation tolerance group to the entity bank account:
a. Click Edit Reconciliation Tolerance Group.
This link only displays if you are editing an external bank account.
b. Follow the instructions in the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

–

To define a target balance rule for the entity bank account:
a. Click Target Balance Rule.
b. Follow the instructions in the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

–

To define the entity bank account’s parent and child relationships with other entity bank
accounts:
a. Click Bank Account Relationships.
b. Follow the instructions in the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Accounting Mirroring Information has been replaced by the bank transaction rule functionality in this
version of CMM. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
7. Click Save.

200

10.4.2.5 Deleting entity bank accounts in CMM
To delete an entity bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Entity Bank Accounts.
2. In the Entity Bank Accounts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Entity Bank Accounts List page, drill down on the entity bank account.
5. In the Entity Bank Accounts Maintenance page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.3 Managing counterparty bank accounts
Counterparty bank accounts are accounts counterparties hold with external banks.
During implementation, you and Wallstreet work together to create counterparty bank accounts.
However, you may need to create new counterparty bank accounts, or edit or delete existing ones
after implementation to reflect changes in your organization.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage counterparty bank

accounts in CMM’s Counterparty Bank Accounts function. Otherwise, manage counterparty
bank accounts in the Accounts page of TRM’s Client Editor.

10.4.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing counterparty bank accounts:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters have been set:
•

Display Counterparty Bank Account Additional Attributes.

For more information, see
Static data

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

States (see Managing states)

•

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties)

•

Banks (see Managing counterparties)

•

Bank account types (see Managing bank account types).

If you are managing counterparty bank accounts in TRM, ensure you have access to the
Client Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing counterparty bank accounts in CMM, ensure you have access to the
following functions:
•

FG-0171 Counterparty Bank Accounts

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

201

10.4.3.2 Managing counterparty bank accounts in TRM
You can manage counterparty bank accounts in TRM using the Accounts page of the Client Editor. If
you are using CMM, select fields in the Accounts page are mapped to fields in CMM’s BANKACCOUNTS
table.
For information on the Accounts page of the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see
the TRM User Guide.

10.4.3.2.1 Account status
In CMM, a bank account’s Account status can have one of the following values: Open, Closed, or
Hierarchy only. The Account status is set in the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page. This is how it
works:

•

Open
In the TRM Client Editor’s Accounts page, if the Hierarchy Only switch is off, and the No CMM
Replication switch is off, then the Account status in CMM is Open.

•

10.4.3.3 Creating counterparty bank accounts in CMM
To create a counterparty bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Bank Accounts.
2. Click Search.
3. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts List page, click New Entry.
4. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts Maintenance page, create the counterparty bank account.
5. Click Save.
As an alternative to creating counterparty bank accounts in CMM, you can create them in Microsoft
Excel using the static and market data import template and then import them into the module. This
approach is more efficient—particularly if you are creating a large number of counterparty bank
accounts.
After downloading the template, do the following:
1. Enter the counterparty bank accounts’ data in the appropriate worksheet.
The template validates the information you enter to ensure it imports correctly.
2. Copy and paste the contents of the worksheet (excluding the header row) to a new workbook.
3. Save the new workbook as a tab-delimited text file.
4. Place the text file in the following folder on the CMM server:
…\[CMM folder]\Imports\BankAcct\
5. Schedule the Bank Accounts Import task in the Task Scheduler function.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

202

10.4.3.4 Editing counterparty bank accounts in CMM
To edit a counterparty bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Bank Accounts.
2. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Account Group Mapping - Mapped Bank Accounts page, drill down on the
counterparty bank account.
5. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts Maintenance page, edit the counterparty bank account.
6. Do the following:

–

To specify if the counterparty bank account can be used in deal settlement for select
instrument categories:
a. Click Modify Settlement Bank Account Assignments.
b. In the Settlement Assignments for Deals page:

–

To allow the counterparty bank account to be used in payment deal settlements for
the instrument category, select the instrument category’s Payment checkbox.

–

To allow the counterparty bank account to be used in receipt deal settlements for the
instrument category, select the instrument category’s Receipt checkbox.

Click Save.

To assign intermediary and correspondent banks to the counterparty bank account:
a. Click Edit Intermediary and Correspondent Bank.
b. In the Intermediary and Correspondent Bank page, assign intermediary and
correspondent banks to the counterparty bank account.
c.

Click Save.

d. Click Return.

–

To define how the counterparty bank account interacts with specific functions in CMM:
a. Click Edit Additional Attributes.
This link only displays if the Display Counterparty Bank Account Additional Attributes
configuration parameter is set to True.
b. In the Additional Bank Account Attributes page, define how the counterparty bank
account interacts with specific functions in CMM.
The controls vary depending on your organization’s installation. For more information,
contact Wallstreet.
c.

Click Save.

7. Click Save.

10.4.3.5 Deleting counterparty bank accounts in CMM
To delete a counterparty bank account in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Counterparties - Counterparty Bank Accounts.
2. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts List page, drill down on the counterparty bank account.
5. In the Counterparty Bank Accounts Maintenance page, click Delete.
6. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

WebSuite User Guide

203

10.4.4 Managing bank account relationships
Bank account relationships allow you to define hierarchical relationships between entity bank
accounts. They are organized into types, and each entity bank account can have multiple parents
and children in a type.
Bank account relationships are intended to replace bank account groups. If your organization is
implementing CMM for the first time, use bank account relationships rather than bank account
groups.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage bank account

relationships in CMM’s Bank Account Relationships function. Otherwise, manage bank
account relationships in TRM’s CMM Relationship Type Editor.

10.4.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing bank account relationships:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

If you are managing bank account relationships in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM
Relationship Type Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing bank account relationships in CMM, ensure you have access to the
following functions:
•

FG-0130 Entity Bank Accounts

•

FG-0501 Bank Account Relationship.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.4.2 Managing bank account relationships and relationship types in TRM
You can manage bank account relationships and relationship types in TRM using the CMM
Relationship Type Editor. Select fields in the CMM Relationship Type Editor are mapped to fields in
CMM’s RELATIONSHIPTYPE table.
For information on the CMM Relationship Type Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the
TRM User Guide.

10.4.4.3 Creating relationship types in CMM
To create a relationship type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Relationships.
2. In the Bank Account Relationships - Criteria Selection page, click Edit Bank Account Relationship Types.
3. In the Bank Account Relationship Type List page, click New.
4. In the Bank Account Relationship Type Maintenance page, create the relationship type.
5. Click Save.

204

10.4.4.4 Editing relationship types in CMM
To edit a relationship type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Relationships.
2. In the Bank Account Relationships - Criteria Selection page, click Edit Bank Account Relationship Types.
3. In the Bank Account Relationship Type List page, drill down on the relationship type.
4. In the Bank Account Relationship Type Maintenance page, edit the relationship type.
5. Click Save.

10.4.4.5 Deleting relationship types in CMM
To delete a relationship type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Relationships.
2. In the Bank Account Relationships - Criteria Selection page, click Edit Bank Account Relationship Types.
3. In the Bank Account Relationship Type List page, drill down on the relationship type.
4. In the Bank Account Relationship Type Maintenance page, click Delete.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.4.6 Managing bank account relationships in CMM
To manage bank account relationships in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Supporting Data - Bank Account Relationships.
2. In the Bank Account Relationships - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Account Relationship List page:

–

To create a bank account relationship:
a. Select a relationship type in the Relationship Type list.
b. Select an entity bank account in the Bank Account list.
c.

Click Apply Relationship.

–

To edit a bank account relationship, click Apply in the bank account relationship’s row.

–

To view a bank account relationship, click View in the bank account relationship’s row. (Do not
continue to step 5.)

5. In the Bank Account Relationships page, select the appropriate parent and child entity bank
accounts.
The multiple selection lists in the Bank Account Relationships page display open and
hierarchy-only entity bank accounts to which you have security by bank account access.

10.4.4.7 Bank Account Relationship usage in report criteria
Account relationships are often used in report criteria as a means of filtering data. The field is called
Bank Account Hierarchy Type. It should be used together with the Bank Account field.

WebSuite User Guide

205

You select a Bank Account relationship in the Bank Account Hierarchy Type and an account in the Bank
Account field. The possible results are:

•

If the bank account is found in the Bank Account Hierarchy Type, then the report returns data for the
bank account specified and all the sub accounts in the corresponding relationship.

•

If the bank account is not found in the hierarchy, then the hierarchy is ignored, and the report
returns data for the selected bank account only.

•

If you select a Bank Account Hierarchy Type but set the Bank Account field to All then the relationship is
disregarded and the report returns data for all bank accounts in the hierarchy.

10.4.5 Managing bank account groups
Bank account groups allow you to sort your organization’s bank accounts into meaningful groups for
reporting purposes.
Bank account groups and bank accounts can exist in a many-to-many relationship:

•

Any number of bank accounts can belong to a bank account group.

•

A bank account can belong to any number of bank account groups.

Some examples of bank account groups include:

•

All US dollar accounts in the corporate group

•

All euro accounts belonging to a particular company of the corporate group

•

All accounts of different companies of the group in the same bank or branch.

Bank account relationships are intended to replace bank account groups. If your organization is
setting up CMM for the first time, use bank account relationships rather than bank account groups.
For more information, see Managing bank account relationships.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage bank account groups

in CMM’s Bank Account Group Mapping function. Otherwise, manage bank account groups
in TRM’s CMM Bank Account Group Editor.

10.4.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing bank account groups:
Category
Static data

Security

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

If you are managing bank account groups in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM Bank
Account Group Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing bank account groups in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
function:
•

FG-0093 Bank Account Group Mapping.

For more information, see

206

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.5.2 Managing bank account groups in TRM
You can manage bank account groups in TRM using the CMM Bank Account Group Editor. Select
fields in the CMM Bank Account Group Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s BANKACCOUNTGROUPS
table.
For information on the CMM Bank Account Group Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the
TRM User Guide.

10.4.5.3 Creating bank account groups in CMM
To create a bank account group in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Bank Account Group Mapping.
2. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
3. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [editor] page, create the bank account group.
4. Click Save.

10.4.5.4 Editing bank account groups in CMM
To edit a bank account group in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Bank Account Group Mapping.
2. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the bank account
group.
3. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [editor] page, edit the bank account group.
4. Click Save.

10.4.5.5 Deleting bank account groups in CMM
To delete a bank account group in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Bank Account Group Mapping.
2. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the bank account
group.
3. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.5.6 Adding bank accounts to groups in CMM
To add bank accounts to a group in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Bank Account Group Mapping.
2. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the bank account
group.
3. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [editor] page, click Map Bank Accounts.
4. In the Bank Account Group Mapping - Mapped Bank Accounts page, click Add Mapping.
5. In the Bank Account Group Mapping - Available Bank Accounts page, select the bank accounts’
Map checkboxes.
6. Click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

207

10.4.5.7 Removing bank accounts from a group in CMM
To remove bank accounts from a group in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Bank Account Group Mapping.
2. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the bank account
group.
3. In the Bank Account Group Mapping Maintenance [editor] page, click Map Bank Accounts.
4. In the Bank Account Group Mapping - Mapped Bank Accounts page, select the appropriate
bank accounts’ Delete Mapping checkboxes.
5. Click Delete Mapping(s).

10.4.6 Managing settlement groups
Settlement groups allow you to sort your organization’s bank accounts into meaningful groups for
settlement purposes.
Settlement groups and bank accounts can exist in a many-to-many relationship:

•

Any number of bank accounts can belong to a settlement group.

•

A bank account can belong to any number of settlement groups.

Note: The Settlement Groups function works best when the number of bank accounts assigned to
a group is 200 or less.

10.4.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for configuring settlement groups:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0295 Settlement Groups.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.6.2 Creating settlement groups
To create a settlement group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Settlement Groups.
2. In the Settlement Groups Maintenance page, select New Settlement Group in the Settlement Group
list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Settlement Group Maintenance page, enter the name of the settlement group in the
Settlement Group Name field.
5. Assign entity bank accounts to the settlement group.
6. Click Save.

208

After you have created a settlement group, your system administrator must assign it to the
appropriate security by settlement group profiles so that you can access it. For more
information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.6.3 Editing settlement groups
To edit settlement groups:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Settlement Groups.
2. In the Settlement Groups Maintenance page, select the settlement group in the Settlement Group
list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Settlement Group Maintenance page, change the name of the settlement group in the
Settlement Group Name field.
5. Assign entity bank accounts to the settlement group.
6. Click Save.

10.4.6.4 Deleting settlement groups
To delete settlement groups:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Settlement Groups.
2. In the Settlement Groups Maintenance page, select the settlement group in the Settlement Group
list.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Settlement Group Maintenance page, click Delete.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.7 Managing signatories (and related data)
In Wallstreet Suite, you can maintain information on your organization’s people.

Note: In Wallstreet Suite, people are not the same as users. In other words, the information you
maintain on people is stored in a different database table than the information you
maintain on users. For information on users, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

After you have created a person, you can define him or her as a signatory. A signatory is a person
who is given permission to authorize payments from your organization’s bank accounts. In many
organizations, more than one signatory is required to authorize a payment.
You can organize signatories into group and assign group to bank accounts. In addition, you can
create signatory rules, which define the circumstances in which a signature is required on
transactions made through the bank accounts.

10.4.7.1 Managing people and signatories
You can maintain information on your organization’s people in Wallstreet Suite and define select
people as signatories.
On occasion, you may need to remove signing authority from a person. You can do this while
maintaining the person’s signatory history for archival purposes by designating the person as an
inactive signatory. When you designate a person as an inactive signatory, he or she remains in the
list of signatories and any assigned groups but is marked as inactive. This functionality is particularly
beneficial if you need to remove signing authority from a person on a temporary basis. It allows you
to maintain the person in the list of signatories and any assigned groups rather than having to
remove the signatory from them and then having to reassign him or her to them when re-activated.

WebSuite User Guide

209

You can also designate a person as a non-signatory and remove that person from the signatory list
and any assigned groups.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage people in CMM’s

People function. Otherwise, manage counterparty contacts in the Contacts page of TRM’s
Client Editor.

10.4.7.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing people and signatories:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Countries (see Managing countries)

•

Employee roles (see Managing employee roles)

•

Entities (see Managing entities).

If you are managing people in TRM, ensure you have access to the Client Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing people in CMM, ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0065 People.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.7.2 Managing people in TRM
You can manage people in TRM using the Contacts page of the Client Editor. If you are using CMM,
select fields in the Contacts page are mapped to fields in CMM’s AUROSPEOPLE table.
For information on the Contacts page of the Client Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see
the TRM User Guide.

10.4.7.2.1 Creating people
To create a person:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - People.
2. In the People Maintenance List page, click New Entry.
3. In the People Maintenance page, create the person.
4. Click Save.
5. Assign employee roles to the person.

10.4.7.2.2 Editing people
To edit a person:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - People.
2. In the People Maintenance List page, drill down on the person.
3. In the People Maintenance page, edit the person.
4. Click Save.
5. Assign employee roles to the person.

210

10.4.7.2.3 Deleting people
To delete a person:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - People.
2. In the People Maintenance List page, drill down on the person.
3. In the People Maintenance page, click Delete.
4. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.7.2.4 Defining people as signatories
To define a person as a signatory:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - People.
2. In the People Maintenance List page, drill down on the person.
3. In the People Maintenance page, click Signatory Information.
4. In the Signatory Maintenance page, select the Signatory checkbox and define the person as a
signatory.
5. Click Save.

10.4.7.2.5 Accessing the signatories table
If a person is a signatory, his or her name displays in the signatory table. You can access the
signatory table in both the People function and the Signatories function by clicking Signatory List.
From the signatory table, you can open the Signatory Maintenance page and edit active and inactive
signatories.

10.4.7.3 Managing signatory groups
After you have defined people as signatories, you can manage signatory groups and add the
signatories to those groups.
You can only create a signatory group for one bank account. Therefore, if you want to configure a
set of signatories for more than one bank account, you must create identical signatory groups for
each bank account.

10.4.7.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing signatory groups:
Category
Static data

Security

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts)

•

People (see Managing people and signatories).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0076 Signatories.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

211

10.4.7.3.2 Creating signatory groups
To create a signatory group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click All Entity Bank Accounts.
3. In the Entity Bank Accounts List page, drill down on the appropriate entity bank account.
4. In the Entity Bank Accounts Maintenance page, click Edit Rules and Groups.
If the entity bank account has existing signatory rules and groups, you can also select Admin Static Data - Entities - Signatories and click Rules and Groups in the entity bank account’s row.
5. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, click New Entry in the Current Groups section.
6. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, create the signatory group.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Add Signatories.
9. In the Add Signatory(s) page, assign signatories to the group by selecting the signatories’
checkboxes.
10. Click Add Selected.

10.4.7.3.3 Editing signatory groups
To edit a signatory group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules and Groups in the appropriate entity
bank account’s row.
If the entity bank account does not display, it does not have any assigned signatory groups or
rules.
3. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, drill down on the signatory group.
4. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, edit the signatory group.
5. Click Save.

10.4.7.3.4 Deleting signatory groups
To delete a signatory group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules and Groups in the appropriate entity
bank account’s row.
If the entity bank account does not display, it does not have any assigned signatory groups or
rules.
3. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, select the signatory group’s checkbox.
4. Click Delete Selected.

10.4.7.4 Managing signatory rules
Signatory rules describe the circumstances in which a signature is required on transactions for
specific bank accounts. These rules are meant as a source of reference for users. They do not drive
CMM functionality.
You can refer to signatory groups in signatory rules. You can use rules across bank accounts;
however, the same does not apply to groups. Therefore, you may need to maintain identical groups
in different bank accounts that share a rule. For more information on signatory groups, see
Managing signatory groups.

212

10.4.7.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing signatory rules:
Category
Static data

Tasks
Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0076 Signatories.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.4.7.4.2 Creating signatory rules
To create a signatory rule:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules List.
3. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
4. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [editor] page, create the signatory rule.
5. Click Save.

10.4.7.4.3 Editing signatory rules
To edit a signatory rule:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules List.
3. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the signatory rule.
4. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [editor] page, edit the signatory rule.
5. Click Save.

10.4.7.4.4 Deleting signatory rules
To delete a signatory rule:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules List.
3. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the signatory rule.
4. In the Signing Rule Maintenance [editor] page, click Delete.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.4.7.4.5 Adding signatory rules to entity bank accounts
To add signatory rules to an entity bank account:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click All Entity Bank Accounts.
3. In the Entity Bank Accounts List page, drill down on the appropriate entity bank account.
4. In the Entity Bank Accounts Maintenance page, click Edit Rules and Groups.

WebSuite User Guide

213

If the entity bank account has existing signatory rules and groups, you can also select Admin Static Data - Entities - Signatories and click Rules and Groups in the entity bank account’s row.
You can create a new rule, which you can then assign to the entity bank account, by clicking
New Entry.
5. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, click Add Rules.
6. In the Add Rules To Assignment page:

–

To add one or more signatory rules to the entity bank account, select their checkboxes.

–

To add all signatory rules to the entity bank account, click Select All.

7. Click Add Selected.
8. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, define the rules’ confirmation statuses, effective
dates, and expiry dates.
9. Click Save.

10.4.7.4.6 Removing signatory rules from entity bank accounts
To remove signatory rules from an entity bank account:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Entities - Signatories.
2. In the Signatory Assignments Maintenance page, click Rules and Groups in the appropriate entity
bank account’s row.
If the entity bank account does not display, it does not have any assigned signatory groups or
rules.
3. In the Bank Account Rule Maintenance page, select the signatory rules’ checkboxes.
4. Click Remove Rule(s).

10.5 Managing instruments
Instruments facilitate the lending, borrowing, or investing of money.
The following table presents the instrument static data for WebSuite:
Static data

CMM function

TRM editor

Instrument
Categories

CMM Instrume
nt Category
Editor

CMM instrume
nt types

Instrument
Types

CMM Instrume
nt Type Editor

CMM instrume
nt group
relationships

Instrument
Groups

N/A

CMM instrume
nt categories

214

CMM

TRM

ACM

N/A

Instrument
Type Editor
Instrument
Group Editor

TRM instrume
nts

Instrument
Editor

10.5.1 Managing CMM instrument categories
In CMM, instrument categories group transactions and deals at a high level, such as short-term
borrowing and investing, and foreign exchange. They drive which types of cash flow calculations are
available.
When your organization first purchases CMM, it selects a set of instrument categories.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage instrument categories
in CMM’s Instrument Categories function. Otherwise, manage instrument categories in
TRM’s CMM Instrument Category Editor.

10.5.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing instrument categories:
Category

Tasks

Security

If you are managing instrument categories in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM
Instrument Category Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing instrument categories in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
function:
•

FG-0104 Instrument Categories.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.5.1.2 Managing instrument categories in TRM
You can manage instrument categories in TRM using the CMM Instrument Category Editor. Select
fields in the CMM Instrument Category Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s INSTRUMENTCATEGORIES
table.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as part of an integrated suite, you can only maintain two
instrument categories: Financial and Commercial.

For information on the CMM Instrument Category Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see
the TRM User Guide.

10.5.1.3 Creating instrument categories in CMM
You cannot create an instrument category in CMM. To create an instrument category, contact
Wallstreet.

WebSuite User Guide

215

10.5.1.4 Editing instrument categories in CMM
To edit an instrument category in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Categories.
2. In the Instrument Categories - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Instrument Categories Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the instrument category.
5. In the Instrument Categories Maintenance [editor] page, edit the instrument category.
6. Click Save.

10.5.1.5 Deleting instrument categories in CMM
You cannot delete an instrument category in CMM. To delete an instrument category, contact
Wallstreet.

10.5.2 Managing CMM instrument types
In CMM, use instrument types to subcategorize instrument categories and to establish market
expectations.
Instrument types with the Status list set to Enabled are referred to as "cash flow types". They display
in Cash Flow Type lists throughout CMM.

Note: If your organization is using CMM as a separate application, manage instrument types in
CMM’s Instrument Types function. Otherwise, manage instrument types in TRM’s CMM
Instrument Type Editor.

10.5.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing instrument types:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Instrument categories (see Managing CMM instrument categories).

If you are managing instrument types in TRM, ensure you have access to the CMM
Instrument Type Editor.
For more information, see the TRM System Admin Guide.
If you are managing instrument types in CMM, ensure you have access to the following
function:
•

FG-0105 Instrument Types.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.5.2.2 Managing instrument types in TRM
You can manage instrument types in TRM using the CMM Instrument Type Editor. Select fields in the
CMM Instrument Type Editor are mapped to fields in CMM’s INSTRUMENTTYPES table.
For information on the CMM Instrument Type Editor and TRM-CMM static data mappings, see the
TRM User Guide.

216

10.5.2.3 Creating instrument types in CMM
To create an instrument type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Types.
2. In the Instrument Category Selection page, drill down on the instrument type’s category.
3. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [list] page, click New Entry.
4. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [editor] page, create the instrument type.
5. Click Save.

10.5.2.4 Editing instrument types in CMM
To edit an instrument type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Types.
2. In the Instrument Category Selection page drill down on the instrument type’s category.
3. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the instrument type.
4. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [editor] page, edit the instrument type.
5. Click Save.

10.5.2.5 Deleting instrument types in CMM
To delete an instrument type in CMM:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Types.
2. In the Instrument Category Selection page drill down on the instrument type’s category.
3. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [list] page, drill down on the instrument type.
4. In the Instrument Type Maintenance [editor] page, dick Delete.
5. In the resulting dialog, click OK.

10.5.2.6 Managing SWIFT MT940 mappings
When you export a bank statement in the SWIFT MT940 or MT940 BCS format, a subset of CMM instrument types are mapped to SWIFT-prescribed codes. This mapping is defined in the
MT940_funds_type_code_mapping.xml file. Therefore, if you create a new instrument type, you
need to add it to the MT940_funds_type_code_mapping.xml file to include it in SWIFT MT940 or
MT940 BCS exported bank statements. For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.

10.5.3 Managing CMM instrument group relationships
In CMM, the Instrument Groups function allows you to configure instrument group relationships.

Note: CMM instrument group relationships are not related to TRM and ACM instrument groups as
described in Managing TRM instruments.

10.5.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing instrument group relationships:
Category

WebSuite User Guide

Tasks

217

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Security

Instrument types (see Managing CMM instrument types).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0267 Instrument Groups.

For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure reporting mapping relationships are available.
For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.5.3.2 Creating instrument relationships
To create an instrument relationship:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, click Insert New Relationship.
3. In the Instruments Relationships Maintenance - Edit Instrument Relationship page, create the
instrument relationship.
4. Click Save.

10.5.3.3 Editing instrument relationships
To edit an instrument relationship:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, drill down on the instrument relationship.
3. In the Instruments Relationships Maintenance - Edit Instrument Relationship page, edit the
instrument relationship.
4. Click Save.

10.5.3.4 Deleting instrument relationships
To delete an instrument relationship:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, drill down on the instrument relationship.
3. In the Instruments Relationships Maintenance - Edit Instrument Relationship page, click Delete.

10.5.3.5 Creating instrument groups
To create an instrument group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, click Insert New Instrument Group.
3. In the Instruments Groups Maintenance - Edit Instrument Group page, create the instrument
group.
4. Click Save.

218

10.5.3.6 Editing instrument groups
To edit an instrument group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, drill down on the instrument group.
3. In the Instruments Groups Maintenance - Edit Instrument Group page, edit the instrument
group.
4. Click Save.

10.5.3.7 Deleting instrument groups
To delete an instrument group:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, drill down on the instrument group.
3. In the Instruments Groups Maintenance - Edit Instrument Group page, click Delete.

10.5.3.8 Creating instrument group relationships
To create instrument group relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, click Insert New Instrument Relationship.
3. In the Instruments Groups Bindings - Insert New Instrument Relationship page, create the
instrument group relationship.
4. Click Continue.
5. Continue to create the instrument group relationship.
6. Click Save.

10.5.3.9 Editing instrument group relationships
To edit instrument group relationships:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Instruments - Instrument Groups.
2. In the Instrument Relationship Report page, drill down on the instrument group relationship.
3. In the Instruments Groups Bindings - Edit Instrument Group Relationship page, assign
instrument groups to the instrument group relationship.
4. Click Edit Instrument Types.
5. Assign instrument types to the instrument group relationship.

10.5.4 Managing TRM instruments
TRM and ACM utilize hierarchical instrument relationships called "instrument groups". In TRM, you
can map CMM instrument types to instrument groups. This ensures CMM can receive instrument
group information from TRM and pass it on to ACM without negatively impacting functionality that
depends on instrument types.
For more information, see the TRM User Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

219

10.6 Reviewing static data through CMM functionality
You can review the following static data through the CMM functionality of WebSuite:

•

Entities

•

Counterparties

•

Entity bank accounts.

10.6.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for reviewing static data through the CMM functionality of WebSuite:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing counterparties)

•

Entity bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0058 Browse Entity Bank Accounts

•

FG-0059 Browse Counterparties

•

FG-0060 Browse Entities.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

10.6.2 Reviewing entities
To review entities using the CMM functionality of WebSuite:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Review - Review Entities.
2. In the Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Entity Report page, drill down on the appropriate entity.
In the Entity View Details page, you can view the entity’s bank accounts by clicking Bank Accounts.

10.6.3 Reviewing counterparties
To review counterparties using the CMM functionality of WebSuite:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Review - Review Counterparties.
2. In the Counterparty - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Counterparty Report page, drill down on the appropriate counterparty.
In the Counterparty View Details page, you can view the counterparty’s bank accounts by
clicking Bank Accounts or its contacts by clicking Counterparty Contacts.

220

10.6.4 Reviewing entity bank accounts
To review entity bank accounts using the CMM functionality of WebSuite:
1. Select Admin - Static Data - Review - Review Entity Bank Accounts.
2. In the Entity Bank Accounts - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Bank Account Report page, drill down on the appropriate entity bank account.

WebSuite User Guide

221

222

Chapter 11

Netting

Netting allows your organization to reduce the number of cross-border payments between entities
by eliminating or consolidating cash flows denominated in different currencies.
In CMM, you can implement netting implicitly by booking transactions on internal bank accounts and
updating balances (which represent the internal bank accounts’ netted positions or obligations) or
explicitly using the Netting Application function.
The Netting Application function contains a set of subfunctions, which allows you to operate within a
predefined netting period entering intercompany transactions, and monitoring activity and positions.

11.1 Managing intercompany payments
The first two steps in the Netting Application function are entering and then editing and approving
intercompany payments.

Note: When you enter an intercompany payment in the Netting Application function with a

different currency than that of the payment’s entity bank account, CMM saves the
payment’s currency and amount fields in this currency. To prevent a potential issue with
ACM, CMM now creates two entries for such payments in the posting file: one with the
currency and amount of the payment and the other with the functional currency and
converted payment amount based on the functional currency.

11.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing intercompany payments:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Counterparties (see Managing entities)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0255 Netting Application

•

FG-0255.01 Enter Intercompany Payments

•

FG-0255.02 Edit and Approve Intercompany Payments.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and bank accounts of the intercompany
payments you want to manage.
For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

223

Netting
setup

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring netting periods.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

11.1.2 Entering intercompany payments
To enter intercompany payments:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 1 – Enter Intercompany Payments.
3. In the Intercompany Payment Entry page:

–

Enter information for all intercompany payments.

–

Enter information for each intercompany payments.
Each row in the table on this page represents an intercompany payment. You can enter up to
25 intercompany payments for your selected entity and netting period. Each intercompany
payment can have its own counterparty and currency.

4. Click Create Cash Records.

11.1.3 Editing intercompany payments
To edit an intercompany payment:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 2 – Edit and Approve Intercompany Payments.
3. In the Intercompany Payment - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Intercompany Payment Editor [list] page, drill down on the intercompany payment.
6. In the Intercompany Payment Editor page, edit the intercompany payment.
7. Click Save.

11.1.4 Deleting intercompany payments
To delete intercompany payments:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 2 – Edit and Approve Intercompany Payments.
3. In the Intercompany Payment - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Intercompany Payment Editor [list] page, drill down on the intercompany payment.
6. In the Intercompany Payment Editor page, click Delete.

224

11.1.5 Approving intercompany payments
To approve an intercompany payment:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 2 – Edit and Approve Intercompany Payments.
3. In the Intercompany Payment - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the Intercompany Payment Editor [list] page, select the intercompany payment’s Approve
checkbox.
6. Click Approve Selected Payments.
After approving an intercompany payment in the Netting Application function, you may need to
authorize it depending on CMM's Payment Flow configuration (see the WebSuite System Admin
Guide).

11.2 Managing foreign exchange offers/asks
The third step in the Netting Application function is entering, editing, and approving foreign
exchange offers/asks to define cross-currency rates.

11.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing foreign exchange offers/asks:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:

Security

•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Entities (see Managing entities)

•

Bank accounts (see Managing entity bank accounts).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0255 Netting Application

•

FG-0255.03 Enter, Edit and Approve FX Offer/Asks.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and bank accounts of the foreign exchange
offers/asks you want to manage.
For more information, see
Netting
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring netting periods.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Netting
workflow

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

WebSuite User Guide

Managing intercompany payments.

225

11.2.2 Entering foreign exchange offers/asks
To enter a foreign exchange offer/ask:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 3 – Enter, Edit and Approve FX Offer/Asks.
3. In the FX Offers/Asks - Criteria Selection page, click Search.
4. In the FX Offers/Asks [list] page, click New Entry.
5. In the FX Offers/Asks [editor] page, enter the foreign exchange offer/ask.
6. Click Save.

11.2.3 Editing foreign exchange offers/asks
To edit a foreign exchange offer/ask:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 3 – Enter, Edit and Approve FX Offer/Asks.
3. In the FX Offers/Asks - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the FX Offers/Asks [list] page, drill down on the foreign exchange offer/ask.
6. In the FX Offers/Asks [editor] page, edit the foreign exchange offer/ask.
7. Click Update.

11.2.4 Deleting foreign exchange offers/asks
To delete a foreign exchange offer/ask:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 3 – Enter, Edit and Approve FX Offer/Asks.
3. In the FX Offers/Asks - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the FX Offers/Asks [list] page, drill down on the foreign exchange offer/ask.
6. In the FX Offers/Asks [editor] page, click Delete.

11.2.5 Approving foreign exchange offers/asks
To approve a foreign exchange offer/ask:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 3 – Enter, Edit and Approve FX Offer/Asks.
3. In the FX Offers/Asks - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Click Search.
5. In the FX Offers/Asks [list] page, drill down on the foreign exchange offer/ask.
6. In the FX Offers/Asks [editor] page, ensure the Approved checkbox is selected.
7. Click Update.

226

11.3 Analyzing netting
You can analyze reconciliation by running the following reports:

•

Net Position by Entity

•

Net Position by Currency

•

Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center.

11.3.1 Running the Net Position by Entity report
The Net Position by Entity report presents transactions from netting activities by entity.

Note: A variation of this report, which displays both netting and settlement transactions, is
available at Banking - Netting - Net Position By Entity.

11.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for Running the Net Position by Entity report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0042 Net Postion by Entity (Netting and Other IHB)

•

FG-0255 Netting Application

•

FG-0255.04 Net Position by Entity.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and bank accounts of the activity you want
to include in the report.
For more information, see
Netting
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring netting periods.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Netting
workflow

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Managing intercompany payments

•

Managing foreign exchange offers/asks.

11.3.1.2 Running the Net Position by Entity report
To run the Net Position by Entity report:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 4 – Net Position by Entity.
3. In the Net Position By Entity - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click
View in Spreadsheet.

WebSuite User Guide

227

11.3.2 Running the Net Position by Currency report
The Net Position by Currency report presents transactions from netting activities by currency.

Note: A variation of this report, which displays both netting and settlement transactions, is
available at Banking - Netting - Net Position By Currency.

11.3.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for Running the Net Position by Currency report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0090 Net Position By Currency (Netting and Other IHB transactions)

•

FG-0255 Netting Application

•

FG-0255.05 Net Position by Currency.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and bank accounts of the activity you want to
include in the report.
For more information, see
Netting
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring netting periods.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Netting
workflow

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Managing intercompany payments

•

Managing foreign exchange offers/asks.

11.3.2.2 Running the Net Position by Currency report
To run the Net Position by Currency report:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 5 – Net Position by Currency.
3. In the Net Position By Currency - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click
View in Spreadsheet.

11.3.3 Running the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report
The Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report presents the net cash flow by sub-center.

11.3.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for Running the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report:
Category

228

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0255 Netting Application

•

FG-0255.06 New Cash Flow by SubCenter.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities and bank accounts of the activity you
want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Netting setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring netting periods.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Netting
workflow

Ensure the following tasks have been completed:
•

Managing intercompany payments

•

Managing foreign exchange offers/asks.

11.3.3.2 Running the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report
To run the Net Cash Flow by Sub-Center report:
1. Select Banking - Netting - Netting Application.
2. In the Step by Step Netting View page, click Step 6 – Net Cash Flow by Subcenter.
3. In the Net Cash Flow By SubCenter - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
4. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click the
View in Spreadsheet.

11.4 Netting and settlement
You can use the netting functionality without also using the settlement functionality. In this
situation, the balances of entities’ internal bank accounts accumulate over time based on the
intercompany transactions in which the entities are involved.
To create a true netting center, however, you need to use the netting functionality with the
settlement functionality.
At the end of a netting period, you settle internal bank accounts. CMM creates a payment to or
receipt from the netting center (in-house bank) to zero out the internal bank accounts. This
effectively aggregates the intercompany transactions, replacing them with one external transaction.
The following is an example netting structure before settlement:

WebSuite User Guide

229

The three parties in this netting structure have entered 14 intercompany transactions:
Flow

Party

Counterparty

Type

Amount (EUR)

Acme Germany

Acme Italy

Payment

50,000

Payment

100,000

Payment

25,000

Total

175,000

Payment

10,000

Payment

15,000

Total

25,000

Payment

25,000

Payment

30,000

Payment

40,000

Total

95,000

230

Acme Italy

Acme Germany

Acme France

Acme Italy

Acme France

Acme Germany

Acme France

Acme Italy

Payment

20,000

Payment

25,000

Total

45,000

Payment

50,000

Payment

60,000

Total

110,000

Payment

30,000

Payment

40,000

Total

70,000

As a result, the parties’ net position are as follows:

•

Acme Germany: 45,000 + 25,000 - 95,000 - 175,000 = (200,000)

•

Acme Italy: 175,000 - 25,000 - 100,000 + 70,000 = 110,000

•

Acme France: 95,000 + 110,000 - 45,000 - 70,000 = 90,000.

The following is the same example during settlement:

Settlement generates the following external transactions:
Flow

Party

WebSuite User Guide

Counterparty

Type

Amount (EUR)

231

Acme Germany

Netting Center

Payment

200,000

Netting Center

Acme Italy

Payment

110,000

Netting Center

Acme France

Payment

90,000

Settlement also generates internal transactions that are opposite to these external transactions to
zero out the internal bank accounts.
For more information on settlement, see Settling bank accounts.

232

Chapter 12

Concentrating cash

Cash concentration allows an organization to centralize cash from its bank accounts for liquidity,
legal, or other reasons. CMM can facilitate cash concentration through the following functionality:

•

Target balancing

•

Settlement.

12.1 Target balancing bank accounts
External banks offer two types of cash concentration:
Type

Description

Zero balance

Automatic sweeping of funds from a lower level account into a header
account at the end of a business day.

Notional

Virtual sweeping of funds where by the actual funds remain in the lower level
accounts, but an aggregated balance is determined in a header account.

If an external bank cannot provide cash concentration, your organization can still obtain its benefits
by using CMM’s target balancing functionality to initiate the sweeps.
In-house banks provide a very efficient mechanism for tracking ownership of cash as it is swept into
or out of pool accounts. In cases where the subsidiary has excess funds, the subsidiary is still the
owner of the cash even after it is swept into a header account. The funds are an asset for the
subsidiary and a liability for the owner of the header pool account. In-house banks track the
ownership of the cash by using the balances on internal bank accounts to represent the cash held in
the pool’s header accounts.
CMM also offers Notional Cumulative Pooling. This is similar to the Notional cash concentration
option in the table above: no physical transfer takes place in the lower level accounts that are
selected for sweeping. However, another lower level account is used for physically sweeping the
calculated funds to the header account.

12.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for target balancing bank accounts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0338 Cash Monitor.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts you want to sweep.
For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

233

Reports and worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Cash Monitor.

For more information, see
Cash concentration setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Configuring target balance rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

12.1.2 Running all sweeps in a report
To run all sweeps in a report:
1. Select Banking - Target Balancing - Cash Monitor:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

12.1.3 Running select sweeps in a report
To run select sweeps in a report:
1. Select Banking - Target Balancing - Cash Monitor:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Cash Monitor page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. In the report template’s page, make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.
5. Click View Recommended Transfers.
6. In the Recommended Transfers page, make any appropriate changes to the amounts.
7. Select the appropriate sweeps’ checkboxes.
8. Click Run Selected Transfer.

12.2 Settling bank accounts
In some situations, your organization cannot hold funds in internal bank accounts for legal or tax
reasons. There may be restrictions that prevent your organization from maintaining a balance with
an entity that is not a bank or that resides out of country. Due to the intercompany movements
required to offset the on-behalf-of transaction functionality, internal bank accounts can carry large
positive or negative balances. At the end of a period, each entity’s internal bank account may have
to be set to a zero balance (in other words, settled).
Depending on your organization’s in-house bank structure, settlement can occur between an
in-house bank client and a parent entity or between an in-house bank client and an in-house bank.

234

CMM provides an automated process to settle internal bank accounts. The internal bank account
balance represents the portion of the in-house bank managed pool of funds that is owed to or owed
by a client.

Note: When CMM routes a transaction in a multiple in-house bank structure, it generates "routing
legs" (individual payments and receipts that make up a routed transaction). These routing
legs result in new balances in all internal bank accounts involved in the routed transaction.
Therefore you must set up settlement rules for all internal bank accounts involved in
routed transactions—not just the originating and paying bank accounts. After the initial
installation of CMM, Wallstreet can work with your organization to ensure settlement rules
are properly set up for a multiple in-house bank structure.

The following are points to consider before setting up settlement in CMM:

•

Due to organizational and pooling structures, the settlement process allows for sequential
settlement of bank accounts as defined by your organization. For example, the lowest level
(business unit) of the structure will settle to the middle level (national organization). Once the
lowest and the middle level have settled, the middle level will settle to the highest level
(international organization).

•

When you execute the settlement process, it uses the settlement period—whether monthly,
daily, or weekly—to determine the next settlement date. If the next settlement date is less than
or equal to the execution date (in other words, the day you are running the process), the
settlement process runs for the selected bank accounts. If the next settlement date is greater
than the execution day, the settlement process does not run for the selected bank accounts.
When the settlement process runs for a specific bank account, it updates the Last Settlement Date
field with the date the process ran and the Next Settlement Date field with the date the process
should be run again for this bank account based on the defined settlement period.

•

If a bank account requires an additional settlement before the settlement process is scheduled
to run again, you can manually adjust the next settlement date for each bank account to run
when required. Alternatively, you can set the settlement period to none, enabling settlement of
the bank account every time the settlement process is executed.

•

The settlement process only considers reconciled records for inclusion in determining the
amount to settle.

•

The settlement process should ensure actual and calculated bank balances are equal for all bank
accounts flagged for settlement and, if necessary, display an error message in the job log
indicating which accounts require recalculation before the process can execute.

•

Intercompany cash records generated in the settlement process are auto-authorized. However,
external cash records will require authorization and subsequent release. To facilitate this,
internal and external records generated in the settlement process are not linked together by
group ID as with other cash records. Customer reference ID is used to link the intercompany
settlement records to the external settlement records. If an external cash record generated in
the settlement process is rejected, you must manually reject the corresponding intercompany
record.

•

To determine the settlement amount of the second settlement level of bank accounts when the
first level settlement records are not yet reconciled, the process includes the actual bank balance
and then adds on records where cash flow type equals settlement/clearing and where value date
is less than or equal to the value date of the settlement process.

•

Once the accounts have been settled, some form of detailed notification to the entities involved
is required. Entities receiving funds require details of the funds deposited to their bank accounts.
Entities required to make payments, via an external bank, should receive payment detail advice.

12.2.1 Locking and unlocking bank accounts
Before initiating a settlement, you can lock the bank accounts you plan to settle. This prevents other
users from changing those bank accounts’ rules while CMM is completing the settlement process.
Afterwards, you can unlock the bank accounts.

WebSuite User Guide

235

12.2.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for locking and unlocking bank accounts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0313 Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts and settlement groups you
want to settle.
For more information, see
Cash concentration
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup task has been completed:
•

Configuring settlement rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

12.2.1.2 Locking bank accounts
To lock bank accounts:
1. Select Banking - Settlement - Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts.
2. In the Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts - Criteria Selection page, select the appropriate
settlement group or All Settlement Accounts in the Select Settlement Group Accounts to Lock/Unlock
list.
3. Click IHB Account to Lock/Unlock.
4. In the Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts Maintenance page, select the bank accounts.
5. Click Save.

12.2.1.3 Unlocking bank accounts
To unlock bank accounts:
1. Select Banking - Settlement - Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts.
2. In the Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts - Criteria Selection page, select the appropriate
settlement group or All Settlement Accounts in the Select Settlement Group Accounts to Lock/Unlock
list.
3. Click IHB Account to Lock/Unlock.
4. In the Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts Maintenance page, deselect the bank accounts.
5. Click Save.

12.2.2 Settling bank accounts
CMM provides an automated process to settle internal bank accounts. The internal bank account
balance represents the portion of the in-house bank managed pool of funds that is owed to or owed
by a client.
On occasion, you may need to undo a bank account settlement if you need to make adjustments or
corrections to either the bank accounts or transactions to the bank accounts.
CMM allows you to undo a settlement. The module can only undo the whole settlement, not
individual parts of the settlement. When adding settlement rules, you identify which internal bank
accounts will be settled to which internal or external bank accounts. Therefore, when you initiate the
undo settlement process, CMM can only undo the whole settlement. It cannot undo smaller parts of
a settlement.

236

All payments created for the settlement must be reversible. When you initiate the settlement
process, CMM creates internal and external payments (depending on the settlement structure):
Type

Description

Notes

Internal

From an internal bank account to
another internal bank account

Because internal payments do not involve external activity,
you can reverse them at any time. If an internal payment’s
status is manually authorized or released, you must
unauthorize or unrelease it before it can be considered
reversible.

External

From an internal bank account to
an external bank account or from
an external bank account to an
internal bank account

You cannot always reverse external payments. If an external
payment’s status is released, it is not reversible and,
therefore, you cannot reverse the settlement. If the
payment’s status is manually authorized, you must
unauthorize it before it can be considered reversible.

When you initiate the undo settlement process, CMM checks the status of all payments. If all
payments are reversible, the module allows you to continue the process. If any of the payments are
not reversible, the module displays a list of payments in the current settlement that are not
reversible (in authorized or released status for internal or external payments). You must manually
unauthorize and unrelease these payments using the appropriate functionality. Afterwards, you can
complete the undo settlement process.
When undoing a settlement, CMM sets the Last Settlement Date and Next Settlement Date fields to their
values before the settlement. Therefore, if the Last Settlement Date field was set to January 31, and the
Next Settlement Date field was set to February 28, for a particular bank account before settlement, the
module will return the fields to these values when undoing the settlement—even if the settlement
was actually initiated on a day other than February 28.

12.2.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for settling bank accounts:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0309 Settle Bank Accounts

•

FG-0310 Undo Bank Account Settlement.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts and settlement groups
you want to settle.
For more information, see
Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Account Settlement Balance Type.

For more information, see
Cash concentration
setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup task has been completed:
•

Configuring settlement rules.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
Cash concentration
workflow

WebSuite User Guide

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Locking and unlocking bank accounts.

237

12.2.2.2 Settling bank accounts
You can settle bank accounts on a regular basis by scheduling the IHB Account Settlement task in
the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.
You can also settle bank accounts on a one-time basis using the Settle Bank Accounts function:
1. Select Banking - Settlement - Settle Bank Accounts.
2. In the IHB Account Settlement [criteria] page, enter settlement criteria.
When settling a bank account with the gross settlement type, do not manually adjust the
settlement dates as this could cause problems with calculations.
3. Click IHB Accounts to Settle.
4. In the IHB Account Settlement [entity bank account selection] page, select the bank accounts.
5. Click Settle Selected Accounts.

12.2.2.3 Undoing settlement
To undo a settlement:
1. Select Banking - Settlement - Undo Settlement.
2. In the IHB Account Settlement Undo - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the IHB Account Settlement Undo List page, drill down on the settlement.
5. In the IHB Account Settlement Undo page:

–

If all of the settlement’s payments are reversible, click Undo Settlement.

–

If one or more of the settlement’s payments are not reversible:
a. To unauthorize one or more payments, click Undo Payment Authorizations. For further
instructions, see Authorizing transactions.
b. To unrelease one or more payments, click Undo Payment Releases. For further instructions,
see Releasing transactions.
When all payments are reversible, repeat steps 1 to 5.

12.3 Analyzing cash concentration
You can analyze reconciliation by running the following reports:

•

Settlement

•

Net Position by Entity

•

Net Position by Currency.

For information on running the Net Position reports, see Analyzing netting.

Note: These reports are relevant to settlement but not to target balancing.

12.3.1 Running the Settlement report
The Settlement report presents the movement of funds resulting from a settlement.

238

12.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Settlement report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0187 Account Settlement Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts and settlement groups
you want to settle.
For more information, see
Static data

Cash concentration
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies (see Managing currencies)

•

Bank account groups (see Managing bank account groups).

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Settling bank accounts.

12.3.1.2 Running the Settlement report
To run the Settlement report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Settlement Report.
2. In the Account Settlement Report - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click
View in Spreadsheet.

WebSuite User Guide

239

240

Chapter 13 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes

CMM allows you to calculate and then pay or charge the following:

•

Interest

•

Commitment fees

•

Overdraft fees

•

Withholding tax.

13.1 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes
When you initiate interest, fee, and tax calculation, CMM calculates the amount of interest, fees, and
taxes based on the assigned calculation method and bank balance information over the period that
the interest, fees, and taxes are due. It then posts the interest, fees, and taxes in the form of bank
transactions and reconciled cash records for internal bank accounts and un-reconciled cash records
for external bank accounts; calculates the next interest, fee, and tax due date for the entity bank
account; and updates the database accordingly.
This process involves the following stages:
1. CMM selects all bank accounts that match your criteria and that have interest, fee, and tax
calculations with next period start dates prior to the current date.
2. CMM determines the back-value-dated transactions captured since the last interest, fee, or tax
payment or charge.
For each of these back-value-dated transactions, CMM calculates an interest, fee, or tax
adjustment for the transaction’s value date and forward.
3. For each payment period:
a. CMM calculates the interest, fees, and taxes from the start of the period to the start of the
next period.
b. CMM calculates the total interest, fees, and taxes, which is the sum of the interest, fees, and
taxes calculated in step 2 and 3a.

WebSuite User Guide

241

For simple interest, total interest is calculated for the entire period and not for each payment
period.
4. CMM does one of the following:

–

If interest, fees, and taxes are realized internally, CMM generates interest, fee, and tax
internal bank transactions.

–

If interest, fees, and taxes are realized externally:

–

If the total interest, fees, and taxes are less than the maximum threshold:

–
–

CMM sets the next period start date to the current period start date plus the payment
period.

If the total interest, fees, and taxes are greater than or equal to the maximum threshold:

–

CMM creates external payments taking into account days offset.

–

CMM sets the current period start date to the next period start date plus one.

–

CMM sets the next period start date to the current next period start date plus the
payment period.

The entity bank account on the external payment is derived from the External Pool Account bank
account relationship assigned to the internal bank account on which the interest is being calculated.
Similarly, the counterparty bank account on the external interest payment is derived from the Pool
Interest Account bank account relationship assigned to the derived entity bank account.

Note: If the total external interest amount consists of interest for the current interest period and
adjustments to prior interest periods, an aggregate external payment is created. The
composite payments assigned to the aggregate are the current period and prior period
interest.

13.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for calculating interest, fees, and taxes:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameters are set:
•

Post Interest To Period

•

Show Bank Account Group For Interest Calculation.

For more information, see
Static data

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

In-house banks (see Managing in-house banks)

•

Bank account relationships (see Managing bank account relationships)

•

Bank account groups (see Managing bank account groups).

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-0219 Calculate and Post Bank Account Interest

•

FG-0279 Task Scheduler.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts for which you want to
calculate interest, fees, and taxes.
For more information, see

242

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Integration

Ensure CMM is integrated with ACM:
•

The installed attributes for CMM and ACM are set to true in the
integrated_suite_module_config.xml file.

•

The ACM Web Service URL configuration parameter contains the correct URL.

•

You have valid user accounts in both modules.

•

You have access to accounting periods and account period sets in ACM.

•

The ACM Period web service is running.

For more information, see the WSS Suite System Admin Guide.
Interest, fee, and
tax setup

Ensure the following setup tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculation processing

•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculations.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

13.1.2 Calculating interest, fees, and taxes
You can calculate interest and fees on a regular basis by scheduling the Interest Fee Tax Calculation
task in the Task Scheduler function. For more information, see Creating parameter sets in the
WebSuite System Admin Guide.
You can also calculate interest, fees, and taxes on a one-time basis using the Interest Calculation
function:
1. Select Banking - Interest - Interest Calculation.
2. In the Bank Account Selection - Criteria Selection page:

–

To calculate interest, fees, and taxes all bank accounts in a bank account relationship:
a. Select the appropriate bank account relationship type in the Bank Account Hierarchy Type list.
b. Select the appropriate parent (hierarchy-only) bank account in the Bank Account list.
c.

Select the appropriate interest, fee, and tax types in the Calculation Type list.

d. Click Calculate Interest and Fee.

–

To calculate interest, fees, and taxes for all bank accounts in an in-house bank:
a. Select the in-house bank in the In House Bank list (or select All for all in-house banks).
b. Select the appropriate interest, fee, and tax types in the Calculation Type list.
c.

–

Click Calculate Interest and Fee.

To calculate interest, fees, and taxes for select bank accounts:
a. Select a bank account relationship or in-house bank.
b. Click Select Accounts.
c.

In the Bank Account Selection page, select the bank accounts.

d. Click Calculate Interest and Fee.
3. To check the status of processed interest calculation on accounts, go to Admin - Utilities - Review Job
Logs.
As mentioned in step 2, you can calculate interest, fees and taxes for all in-house banks by selecting
All in the In House Bank field. When you undo calculations, the All option is not available for in-house
banks, you need to undo them one-by-one.

WebSuite User Guide

243

13.2 Undoing interest, fee, and tax calculations
If necessary, you can undo the last interest, fee, and tax calculation for a select entity bank account,
bank account relationship, or in-house bank. You can then make any corrections and recalculate
interest, fees, and taxes on the entity bank account, bank account relationship, or in-house bank.
When you undo an interest, fee, and tax calculation for an external bank account, CMM reverses—
rather than deletes—the unreconciled cash records created during the calculation process. The
transaction and value dates on the reversal cash records are the same as those on the original
interest, fee, and tax calculation cash records.
When you undo an interest, fee, and tax calculation for an internal bank account, CMM deletes the
cash records and reverses the bank transactions.
You can only undo the most recent interest, fee, and tax calculation for each bank account. When
you undo the most recent interest, fee, and tax calculation, the next most recent one becomes
available. Therefore, you undo interest, fee, and tax calculations sequentially.

13.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for undoing interest, fee, and tax calculations:
Category

Tasks

Configuration
parameters

Ensure the following configuration parameter is set:
•

Show Bank Account Group For Interest Calculation.

For more information, see
Static data

Security

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

In-house banks (see Managing in-house banks)

•

Bank account relationships (see Managing bank account relationships)

•

Bank account groups (see Managing bank account groups).

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0335 Undo Interest Calculation.

In addition, ensure you have access to the bank accounts for which you want to undo
interest, fee, and tax calculations.
For more information, see
Interest, fee, and
tax workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following workflow task has been completed:
•

Calculating interest, fees, and taxes.

13.2.2 Undoing interest, fee, and tax calculations
To undo an interest, fee, or tax calculation:
1. Select Banking - Interest - Undo Interest Calculation.
2. In the Undo Calculate and Post Bank Account Interest and Fee - Criteria Selection page, enter
search criteria.
3. Click Continue.
4. In the Undo Calculate and Post Bank Account Interest and Fee page, select the interest, fee, or
tax calculation’s Undo checkbox.
5. Click Undo.

244

13.3 Analyzing interest, fees, and taxes
You can analyze interest, fees, and taxes by running the following reports:

•

Interest, Fee, and Tax

•

Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation

•

Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods

•

Credit Line

•

Bank Account Summary.

13.3.1 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report
The Interest, Fee, and Tax report allows you to search for and view calculated interest, fees, and
taxes on a bank-account-by-bank-account basis.

Note: You can use this report before or after calculating interest, fees, and taxes. If you use it

before, you can preview how CMM will allocate interest, fees, and taxes to bank accounts
before actually calculating interest, fees, and taxes.

13.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0160 Interest Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the bank transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Interest Report.

For more information, see
Interest, fee, and
tax setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculation processing

•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculations

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

245

13.3.1.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report
To run the Interest, Fee, and Tax report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Interest - Interest Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Interest and Fee Calculation Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

13.3.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report
The Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report provides up-to-date information on the allocation of
interest, fees, and taxes to the internal bank accounts held by an entity.
The report includes one row for each posting, noting the bank account, the bank account currency,
the date, and the amount of interest, fee, or tax posted.
CMM allocates interest, fees, and taxes to the internal bank accounts based on their bank balances
and assigned interest, fee, and tax calculation methods. To ensure the bank balances and interest in
the report are up-to-date, update the bank balances before generating the report. For more
information, see Updating and recalculating bank balances.

Note: You can run the Interest, Fee and Tax Allocation report before or after calculating interest,
fees, and taxes. If you run it before, you can use it to preview how CMM will allocate
interest, fees, and taxes to bank accounts before actually calculating interest, fees, and
taxes.

13.3.2.0.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Interest, Fee, and Tax report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0133 Bank Accounts Interest Allocation Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
bank transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Interest, fee,
and tax setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup tasks have been completed:
•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculation processing

•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculations.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

13.3.2.1 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report
To run the Interest, Fee, and Tax Allocation report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Interest Allocation.
2. In the In House Bank Accounts Interest Allocation - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.

246

13.3.3 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report
The Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report allows you to review interest, fee, and tax
calculation methods you created in the Interest Calculation Methods function (see the WebSuite
System Admin Guide).

13.3.3.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0134 Bank Accounts Interest Allocation Methods Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of the
interest, fee, and tax calculation methods you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Review Interest Calculation Methods.

For more information, see
Interest, fee,
and tax setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup task has been completed:
•

Configuring interest, fee, and tax calculation methods

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

13.3.3.2 Running the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report
To run the Interest, Fee, and Tax Calculation Methods report:
1. Select Admin - Market Data - Review - Review Interest Calculation Methods:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Interest Calculation Methods page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

13.3.4 Running the Credit Line report
The Credit Line report allows you to create customized report templates that can display balances in
bank accounts, remaining credit lines, and total credit lines.

13.3.4.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Credit Line report:
Category

WebSuite User Guide

Tasks

247

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0375 Credit Line Report.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the bank transactions you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Credit Line Report.

For more information, see
Interest, fee, and
tax setup

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following setup task has been completed:
•

Configuring credit line limits.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

13.3.4.2 Running the Credit Line report
To run the Credit Line report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Credit Line Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Credit Line Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

13.3.5 Running the Bank Account Summary report
The Bank Account Summary report allows you to review current (or "active") interest, fee, and tax
calculations; credit lines; and credit line limits. In addition, you can review previous (or "inactive")
interest, fee, and tax calculations; credit lines; and credit line limits for auditing purposes.

13.3.5.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Bank Account Summary report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0396 Credit Line Limit Reports.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts of
the interest, fee, and tax calculations; credit lines; and credit line limits you want to
include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Bank Account Summary Report.

For more information, see

248

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Interest, fee, and
tax workflow

Ensure the following setup tasks have been completed:
•

Calculating interest, fees, and taxes.

13.3.5.2 Running the Bank Account Summary report
To run the Bank Account Summary report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Bank Account Summary Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Bank Account Summary Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

WebSuite User Guide

249

250

Chapter 14

Reporting to central banks

Central bank data allows you to create internal and external regulatory codes and then assign
internal regulatory codes to transactions.

14.1 Managing transaction regulatory codes
After defining and mapping internal and external regulatory codes, you can assign the internal
regulatory codes to transactions during transaction capture. For more information, see 5.1.2
Entering transactions on page 91.
The Regulatory Transaction Codes function allows you to view and change the internal regulatory
codes of all transactions that match your criteria.

14.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for managing transaction regulatory codes:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0302 Regulatory Transaction Code Maintenance.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Expected and
instructed
activity

Ensure the following task has been completed:

Central bank
reporting setup

Ensure the following task has been completed:

•

5.1.2 Entering transactions on page 91.

Configuring regulatory codes.

For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

WebSuite User Guide

251

14.1.2 Managing transaction regulatory codes
To manage transaction regulatory codes:
1. Select Banking - Central Banking - Regulatory Transaction Codes.
2. In the Regulatory Transaction Code Maintenance - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Regulatory Transaction Code Maintenance List page:

–

To change a cash record’s internal regulatory code:
a. Select a code or None Selected in the cash record’s Internal Regulatory Code list.
b. Click Update.

–

To view a cash record’s details, click Cash Record ID in the cash record’s row.

14.2 Analyzing transaction regulatory codes
You can analyze transaction regulatory codes by running the following reports:

•

Central Bank

•

Regulatory.

14.2.1 Running the Central Bank report
Central banks require codes be attached to all transactions to further describe the purpose of the
transaction for reporting purposes. Central banks have a standard set of such codes called
regulatory codes. Some regulatory codes have an additional code that further clarifies the
transaction type. A number of transfers can use a set of regulatory codes; however, the additional
code indicates whether the transfer of monies is going into or out of a country.
You can use the Central Bank report to view and analyze transactions from a central bank
perspective.

14.2.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Central Bank report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0073 Central Bank Regulatory Report.

For more information, see
Central bank
reporting workflow

252

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

14.1 Managing transaction regulatory codes on page 251.

14.2.1.2 Running the Central Bank report
To run the Central Bank report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Central Bank Regulatory Report.
2. In the Central Bank Regulatory Report - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click
View In Spreadsheet.

The format of the report varies depending on the country you selected in step 2.
Your selected country may not have a format defined for it in your installation. If this is the case,
the following message displays after you click Report or View In Spreadsheet:
The central bank regulatory report is not yet available for this country. Please
consult with your Wallstreet contact if you require this functionality.

14.2.2 Running the Regulatory report
Central banks require codes be attached to all transactions to further describe the purpose of the
transaction for reporting purposes. Central banks have a standard set of such codes called
regulatory codes. Some regulatory codes have an additional code that further clarifies the
transaction type. A number of transfers can use a set of regulatory codes; however, the additional
code indicates whether the transfer of monies is going into or out of a country.
You can use the Regulatory report to view and analyze transactions from a central bank perspective.

14.2.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Regulatory report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0288 Regulatory Reporting.

For more information, see
Central bank
reporting workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

14.1 Managing transaction regulatory codes on page 251.

14.2.2.2 Running the Regulatory report
To run the Regulatory report:
1. Select Reporting - Banking - Regulatory Reporting.
2. In the Regulatory Reporting - Criteria Selection page, enter search criteria.
3. Do one of the following:

–

To view the report in your browser, click Report.

–

To view the report in a spreadsheet application (for example, Microsoft Excel), click
View In Spreadsheet.

WebSuite User Guide

253

254

Chapter 15 Exporting accounting events to ACM

To facilitate accounting, information can flow from CMM to ACM.
Each accounting event represents a single transaction in CMM at a certain state in its life cycle that
is configured to post to accounting. CMM can also transfer instruction accounting events for special
accounting actions.

Note: In this release, CMM only includes reversal instruction accounting events to reverse a
previously sent accounting event.

The following diagram presents the steps that occur when the ACM daily accounting process
executes:

The following diagram presents the steps that occur when the ACM closing-the-book accounting
process executes:

WebSuite User Guide

255

15.1 Generating daily accounting events
Usually, ACM triggers the generation of accounting events as described in Chapter 15 Exporting
accounting events to ACM on page 255. However, during the initial implementation of CMM, you
may need to trigger the generation of accounting events manually as part of your organization’s
testing of the module. You can do this using the Generate Daily Accounting Events function.

15.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for generating daily accounting events:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0374 Generate Daily Accounting Events.

For more information, see
Integration

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure CMM is integrated with ACM.
For more information, see the WSS Suite System Admin Guide.

15.1.2 Generating daily accounting events
To generate daily accounting events:
1. Select Accounting - Processing - Generate Daily Accounting Events.
2. In the Generate Daily Accounting Events page, enter search criteria.
3. Click Generate.

256

15.2 Reconciling bank balances
Differences in timing between the capture and processing of transactions, and posting of events to
the general ledger can cause variances between CMM and ACM bank balances. Specifically, the
following situations can occur:

•

Transactions accounted for in CMM but not ACM

–

CMMposting rules are not set up correctly. As a result, some do not post and are not sent to
ACM.

–

ACM mapping rules are not set up correctly.

–

Events in CMM that are available to be pulled to ACM are not pulled due to errors.

–

CMM’s bank balances reflect bank transactions regardless of their reconciliation status;
however, ACM’s bank balances only reflect reconciled bank transactions.

Transactions accounted for in ACM but not CMM

–

Future-transaction-dated transactions that are reconciled are sent to ACM and reflect in its
bank balances. However, they do not reflect in CMM’s.

To allow you to address these situations, the following functions include default bank balance
reconciliation reports:

•

Cash Transaction Report

•

Bank Transaction Report

•

Bank Balance Analysis

•

Accounting Events Report.

15.2.0.1 Updating and reviewing bank balances
Before reconciling bank balances, you must update and review them in CMM. To do this:
1. Update bank balances in CMM. (For more information, see 6.4 Updating and recalculating bank
balances on page 124.)
If you do not complete this step, bank balances will not correctly reflect any newly captured
transactions and, consequently, the actual cash position.
2. Run the Bank Transaction Reconciliation report, which is available in the Bank Transaction
Report function. (For more information, see 6.6.2 Running the Bank Transaction report on page
131.)
When running the report, enter the following criteria in addition to typical dates, entities, entity
bank accounts, and so on:

–

Select Unreconciled in the Transactions to Display list.

–

Select Fully Sent in the Accounting Entries Sent list.

Doing this reveals all possible reversed transactions that are throwing off the current bank
balance. If any transactions exist, complete an "ACM Pull", which triggers the reversal of any
required reversal operations. This brings CMM’s bank balances to a cleaner, more updated, and
more manageable state. After this is done, you can complete the actual bank balance
reconciliation.

WebSuite User Guide

257

15.2.0.2 Reconciling bank balances
To reconcile bank balances:
1. Run the following reports:

–

In CMM, the Bank Balance Reconciliation report, which is available in the Bank Balance
Analysis function. (For more information, see 6.6.3 Running the Bank Balance Analysis
report on page 132.)

–

In ACM, run the Event Date Balance Query report. (For more information, see the ACM User
Guide.)

If you are comparing a large volume of bank balances, consider the following options:

–

View the reports in a spreadsheet application. To do this for the Bank Balance Reconciliation
report, select Excel in the report’s Display Media list and then click Refresh.

–

Sort bank balances in the reports by different criteria. If bank account names are uniquely
defined and there is a one-to-one relationship between general ledger accounts in ACM and
cash accounts in CMM, both reports can be sorted by bank account name for easier
reconciliation. (If the synchronization of bank account numbers or names between ACM and
CMM is important, ensure the bank accounts are uniquely named or numbered and that the
names and numbers are consistent across the two modules.

2. Compare the closing bank balances in the two reports:

–

If the closing bank balances are the same, the bank balances in CMM and ACM reconcile. Do
not continue to step 3.

–

If the closing bank balances are not the same, the bank balances in CMM and ACM do not
reconcile. Continue to step 3.

When comparing bank balances with different date ranges, be aware that back- and future-date
transactions can cause differences in bank balances. For example, a future-dated transaction
may not be included in CMM’s bank balance but may be included in ACM’s if the search date
ranges are different). Simplify the reconciliation process by ensuring the same search criteria
are used in the two reports.
3. Do the following:
a. In the CMM Bank Balance Reconciliation report, drill down on the Net Change (Balance Movement)
amount for any date to view transaction details.
b. In the ACM Event Date Balance Query report, for the same date, drill down on the Balance
Movement amount for the same date to view transaction details.
4. Compare the transactions:

–

If CMM is missing transactions:
Problem

Verification

Resolution

Transactions were manually
entered in ACM.

Run the appropriate report in
ACM to determine the origin of
the transactions.

Acknowledge and ignore these
transactions, as ACM does not
send postings to CMM.

If ACM is missing transactions:
Problem

258

Verification

Resolution

One or more CMM
accounting events
may not have been
sent to ACM.

In the page that displayed when you
drilled down on the Net Change (Balance
Movement) amount, identify all
transactions that have not been
sent.

In ACM, run the event pull operation
to transmit unsent events. If any
unsent events remain in CMM after
you complete this task due to
communication or other failures,
investigate and resolve those
failures.

CMM has not
created accounting
events to post or
send.

Run the CMM Bank Transaction
Reconciliation Report, which is
available in the Bank Transaction
Report function, with the following
criteria:

For unreconciled transactions, use
the appropriate reconciliation
functions in CMM (Bank
Reconciliation, Manual Reconciliation,
and so on) to reconcile the bank
transactions to cash records.

•

Select Reconciled in the
Transactions to Display list.

•

Select Will or Have Been
Posted in the Posting Required list.

•

Select Not Posted in the
Posting Done list.

•

Select Not Sent in the Accounting
Entries Sent list.

Using the report, check if there are
any transactions that have not been
reconciled, posted, or sent properly.
CMM has not
reconciled the
transactions.

Run the CMM Bank Transaction
Reconciliation Report, which is
available in the Bank Transaction
Report function, with the following
criteria:
•

Select Reconciled in the
Transactions to Display list.

•

Select

Will or Have Been
Posted in the Posting Required

list.
•

Select

Not Posted then
Partially Posted in the

Posting Done list.
•

Select

Not Sent then
Partially Sent in the

For unposted transactions, check
posting rules in CMM to ensure they
are correctly set up.
For unsent transactions, run the
Accounting Events Reconciliation
report, which is available in the
Accounting Events Report function, to
review the export statuses of unsent
transactions. If failures exist,
investigate and resolve them prior to
performing an event pull in ACM.

For unreconciled transactions, use
the appropriate reconciliation
functions in CMM (Bank
Reconciliation, Manual Reconciliation,
and so on) to reconcile the bank
transactions to cash records.
For unposted transactions, check
posting rules in CMM to ensure they
are correctly set up.
For unsent transactions, run the
Accounting Events Reconciliation
report, which is available in the
Accounting Events Report function, to
review the export statuses of unsent
transactions. If failures exist,
investigate and resolve them prior to
performing an event pull in ACM.

Accounting Entries Sent list.
Using the report, check if there are
any transactions that have not been
reconciled, posted, or sent properly.

WebSuite User Guide

259

ACM’s event
mapping rules may
be set up
incorrectly, causing
events to be
unmapped or
mapped to incorrect
ledgers.

N/A

Confirm transactions have been
successfully sent to ACM using any of
the following CMM reports:
•

Balance Reconciliation Report

•

Bank Transaction Reconciliation
Report

•

Cash Transaction Reconciliation
Report

•

Accounting Events Reconciliation
Report.

Note the sent transactions and verify
that they are all mapped to the
correct ledger in ACM.

15.3 Analyzing accounting events
You can analyze accounting events by running the following report:
Accounting Events.

•

15.3.1 Running the Accounting Events report
The Accounting Events report, which is based on the flexible reporting framework, allows you to
analyze accounting events generated by CMM for transfer to ACM. Use this report in conjunction
with ACM’s Entry State report to view the information flow from CMM to ACM.

15.3.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Accounting Events report:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-0383 Accounting Events.

In addition, ensure you have access to the entities, counterparties, and bank accounts
of the accounting events you want to include in the report.
For more information, see
Reports and
worksheets

Ensure templates have been created for the following function:
•

Accounting Events Report.

For more information, see
Integration

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure CMM is integrated with ACM.
For more information, see the WSS Suite System Admin Guide.

260

15.3.1.2 Running the Accounting Events report
To run the Accounting Events report:
1. Select Reporting - Accounting - Accounting Events Report:

–

If you did not previously select a favorite report template, continue to step 2.

–

If you previously selected a favorite report template, continue to step 3.

2. In the Accounting Events Report page, drill down on the appropriate report template.
3. Make any appropriate changes to the report criteria.
4. Click Refresh.

WebSuite User Guide

261

262

Chapter 16

Trading

The following table presents the instruments available in the standard web interface of TRM:
Foreign exchange market (FX)
Foreign exchange market (FX)

•

FX spots

•

FX forwards

•

FX swaps

•

FX options

•

Fixed rate instruments (such as deposits, bonds, FRAs, and
loans)

•

Floating rate instruments

•

Composite instruments

•

IR options

•

Futures

•

Payments

•

Transfers

•

Equities

•

Equity forwards and futures

•

Equity options

Interest rate market (IR)
Money market

BA market (BA)
Cash management

Equities market (EQ)
Equities

Note: You can denominate the instruments in any currency, and they can contain several

variants. For example, FX instruments cover FX forwards, spots, swaps, options, and so
on.

16.1 Entering deals
You can enter deals for the instruments listed at the beginning of this chapter.

WebSuite User Guide

263

16.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering deals:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies

•

Clients

•

Instruments

•

Portfolios.

For more information, see the TRM User Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-1001 [Capture] Spot

•

FG-1002 [Capture] Spot (Batch Entry)

•

FG-1003 [Capture] Forward

•

FG-1004 [Capture] Swap

•

FG-1005 [Capture] Option

•

FG-1006 [Capture] Short Deposit/Loan

•

FG-1007 [Capture] Fixed Deposit/Loan

•

FG-1008 [Capture] Floating Deposit/Loan

•

FG-1009 [Capture] Bond

•

FG-1010 [Capture] Discount

•

FG-1011 [Capture] IR Swap

•

FG-1012 [Capture] Cross Currency IR Swap

•

FG-1013 [Capture] Equity

•

FG-1014 [Capture] BA Balance

•

FG-1015 [Capture] Payment

•

FG-1016 [Capture] Transfer.

For more information, see

264

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

16.1.2 Entering single deals
To enter a single deal:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Spot

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Spot (Batch Entry)

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Forward

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Swap

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Option

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Short Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Fixed Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Floating Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Bond

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Discount

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - IR Swap

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Cross Currency IR Swap

–

Trading - Capture - Equity - Equity

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - BA Balance

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - Payment

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - Transfer.

2. In the resulting page, enter the deal.
In the default installation, the Portfolio list is disabled until you enter the following information:

–

Currency

–

Instrument

–

Counterparty.

The page reloads automatically. The Portfolio list is enabled; it contains portfolios for the selected
currency, instrument and counterparty and for which you have security access.
3. Do one of the following:

–

If the deal requires transaction subentities (for example, a loan with multiple schedule):
a. Click Next.
b. Enter the transaction subentities.
c.

–

Click Save.

If the deal does not require transaction subentities, click Save.

WebSuite User Guide

265

16.1.3 Entering multiple deals
To enter multiple deals:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Spot

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Spot (Batch Entry)

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Forward

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Swap

–

Trading - Capture - Foreign Exchange - Option

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Short Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Fixed Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Floating Deposit/Loan

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Bond

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Discount

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - IR Swap

–

Trading - Capture - IR Instruments - Cross Currency IR Swap

–

Trading - Capture - Equity - Equity

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - BA Balance

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - Payment

–

Trading - Capture - Cash - Transfer.

2. In the resulting page, select the tab to enter multiple deals.
3. In the resulting page, enter the deals.
4. Do the following:

–

To add a new deal, click Add line.

–

To remove an existing deal, click Del in its row.

5. Click Submit All.

16.2 Editing deals
After entering a deal, you can search for and edit it in WebSuite.

16.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for editing deals:
Category

266

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-1032 [Review Transaction] Simple Search

•

FG-1033 [Review Transaction] Advanced Search.

For more information, see
Treasury
management
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

Entering deals.

16.2.2 Editing deals
To edit a deal:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Trading - Processing - Review Transactions - Simple Search

–

Trading - Processing - Review Transactions - Advanced Search.

2. In the resulting page, enter criteria.
3. Click Search.
4. In the resulting page, drill down on the deal.
5. In the resulting page, do the following:

–

Enter or modify comments in the Comment field.

–

Modify a schedule by clicking Actions in its row and selecting the appropriate option.

–

Modify a cash flow by clicking Actions in its row and selecting the appropriate option.

–

Expire the deal early by clicking Early Expiration.

–

Roll over the deal by clicking Roll Over.

6. Click Apply.

WebSuite User Guide

267

268

Chapter 17

Commercial lending

You can enter and analyze loan drawdowns using the commercial lending functionality in WebSuite.

17.1 Entering loan drawdowns
You can enter loan drawdowns in WebSuite using the Loan Drawdown Entry function.

17.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for entering loan drawdowns:
Category

Tasks

Static data

Ensure the following static data are available:
•

Currencies

•

Locations

•

Clients

•

Instruments

•

Portfolios.

For more information, see the TRM User Guide.
Security

Ensure you have access to the following function:
•

FG-1024 Loan Drawdown Entry.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

17.1.2 Entering loan drawdowns
To enter a loan drawdown:
1. Select Trading - Capture - Commercial Lending - Loan Drawdown Entry.
2. In the Loan Drawdown Dealing page, enter the loan drawdown.
To select a facility:
a. Click Browse to the right of the Facility list.
b. In the Drawdown browser page, click the facility’s ID or name.

WebSuite User Guide

269

To select a tranche:
a. Click Browse to the right of the Tranche list.
b. In the Drawdown browser page, click the tranche’s ID or name.
3. Click Next.
4. Enter data in the remaining transaction fields and the schedule fields.
5. Click Save.

17.2 Running the Loan Monitor
After entering loan drawdowns as documented in 17.1 Entering loan drawdowns on page 269, you
can run the Loan Monitor.

17.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running the Loan Monitor:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-1026 [Loan Monitor] Basic

•

FG-1027 [Loan Monitor] Advanced

•

FG-1028 [Loan Monitor] Enhanced

•

FG-1029 [Loan Monitor] Expert.

For more information, see
Treasury management
workflow

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Ensure the following task has been completed:
•

17.1 Entering loan drawdowns on page 269.

17.2.2 Running the Loan Monitor
To run the Loan Monitor:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Trading - Capture - Commercial Lending - Loan Monitor - Basic

–

Trading - Capture - Commercial Lending - Loan Monitor - Advanced

–

Trading - Capture - Commercial Lending - Loan Monitor - Enhanced

–

Trading - Capture - Commercial Lending - Loan Monitor - Expert.

2. In the Loan Monitor page, enter the position parameters.
3. Click Get Report.

270

Chapter 18

Analyzing treasury management

In WebSuite, you can run and view several TRM reports. You can also export the reports’ data to
Microsoft Excel.

18.1 Running Treasury Monitor reports
This section explains how you can measure your organization’s current exposure in WebSuite using
the Treasury Monitor reports.
You can measure your exposure and profit/loss for your portfolios. You can group your treasury
positions as follows:

•

By instrument category

•

By instrument group

•

By instrument

•

By maturity bucket

•

By liquidity.

18.1.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running Treasury Monitor reports:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-1051 Instrument Category

•

FG-1052 Instrument Group

•

FG-1053 Instrument

•

FG-1054 Maturity Bucket

•

FG-1055 Liquidity.

For more information, see

WebSuite User Guide

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

271

18.1.2 Running position and risk reports
To run a position and risk report:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Treasury Monitor - Position and Risk - Instrument Category

–

Treasury Monitor - Position and Risk - Instrument Group

–

Treasury Monitor - Position and Risk - Instrument

–

Treasury Monitor - Position and Risk - Maturity Bucket

–

Treasury Monitor - Position and Risk - Liquidity.

2. In the Treasury page, enter the position parameters (for example, Portfolio, Period start, and Period
end).
3. Click Get Report.

18.2 Running other reports
In addition to the Treasury Monitor reports, you can run other TRM reports in WebSuite.

18.2.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for running other reports:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-1034 FX Daily Deals

•

FG-1035 FX Outstanding Position

•

FG-1036 Equity

•

FG-1037 EQ Transactions

•

FG-1038 MM Daily Deals

•

FG-1039 MM Inventory

•

FG-1040 Cashflow

•

FG-1041 Cashflow CP

•

FG-1042 Key Figure

•

FG-1043 Balance

•

FG-1044 Cashflows

•

FG-1045 Fixing Rate.

For more information, see

272

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

18.2.2 Running reports
To run a report:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Reporting - Trading - FX Instruments - FX Daily Deals

–

Reporting - Trading - FX Instruments - FX Outstanding Position

–

Reporting - Trading - EQ Instruments - Equity

–

Reporting - Trading - EQ Instruments - EQ Transactions

–

Reporting - Trading - MM Instruments - MM Daily Deals

–

Reporting - Trading - MM Instruments - MM Inventory

–

Reporting - Trading - Other Reports - Key Figure

–

Reporting - Trading - Other Reports - Balance

–

Reporting - Trading - Other Reports - Cashflows

–

Reporting - Trading - Other Reports - Fixing Rate.

2. In the resulting page, enter the report’s criteria.
3. Select the option button of the layout you want to use for the report.
4. Click Get Report.
Large reports may take several minutes to run.

18.2.3 Exporting reports’ data to Microsoft Excel
After running a report, you can export its data to Microsoft Excel by clicking Export to Excel.

WebSuite User Guide

273

274

Chapter 19

Analyzing accounting

You can run ACM reports in WebSuite to analyze accounting.

19.1 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for analyzing accounting:
Category

Tasks

Security

Ensure you have access to the following functions:
•

FG-2001 Chart of Accounts

•

FG-2002 Chart of Accounts Verification

•

FG-2003 Entry State

•

FG-2004 Journal

•

FG-2005 Trial Balance Summary.

For more information, see

the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

19.2 Running reports
To run a report:
1. Select one of the following:

–

Reporting - Accounting - Chart of Accounts

–

Reporting - Accounting - Chart of Accounts Verification

–

Reporting - Accounting - Entry State

–

Reporting - Accounting - Journal

–

Reporting - Accounting - Trial Balance Summary.

2. In the resulting page, enter the report’s criteria.
3. Select the option button of the layout you want to use for the report.
4. Click Get Report.
Large reports may take several minutes to run.

WebSuite User Guide

275

19.3 Exporting reports’ data to Microsoft Excel
After running a report, you can export its data to Microsoft Excel by clicking Export to Excel.

276

Appendix A

Floats and controlled
disbursements

Floats and controlled disbursements are primarily used by organizations in the United States to
identify and understand their near-term cash positions:

•

A float is a bank balance representing deposits made by a bank account holder that must by
cleared by the Federal Reserve clearance system in the United States (or another clearance
system) with other financial institutions. The Federal Reserve accepts depository information for
presentment to the originating account at the appropriate financial institution, but due to the
nature and structure of the regionalized system, the depository account may not receive value
for the funds for up to three days. However, the Federal Reserve has all the information
pertaining to the timing of the clearance when it receives the presentment information. As a
result, the Federal Reserve can present financial institutions with the balance and details of
items it receives good value for the current day, next day, and up to three days forward. As a
result, organizations can deposit checks and understand exactly when they can access the
funds.

•

A controlled disbursement is a bank balance provided to an organization by its bank based on
the value of checks that clear the organization’s bank account on a specific day. The bank is
aware of these values because the checks have already been presented to other banks and
reported to the Federal Reserve clearance system in the United States (or another clearance
system), which then reports the presentment values to the bank. Usually, the bank provides the
balance to the organization at the beginning of the day. However, the bank can also provide
intraday balances throughout the day. These intraday balances can be incremental or aggregate.

Note: In CMM, floats and controlled disbursements are handled as bank transactions rather than
as bank balances.

The US-Mapping report mapping relationship contains report mapping categories for floats and
controlled disbursements. You can use this report mapping relationship in the Cash Monitor function
to generate cash position reports for entities operating in the United States.
Alternatively, you can create other report mapping relationships that contain report mapping
categories for floats and controlled disbursements. The following sections document the report
mapping functionality that allows you to display floats and controlled disbursements.

Note: While the functionality documented in the following sections is applied to the displaying of

floats and controlled disbursements for organizations operating in the United States, it can
be applied to other applications as well.

WebSuite User Guide

277

A.1 Setup
Before you can view floats and controlled disbursements in CMM, you need to create one or more
BAI interchanges as well as a set of transaction subtype mappings to link the following cash flow
types and BAI codes:
Cash flow type

BAI code

Floats
0 Day Float

070

1 Day Float

072

2 Day Float

074

Controlled disbursements
Controlled Disbursement 1

583

Controlled Disbursement 2

584

Controlled Disbursement Final

588

Note: If you do not want to view floats and controlled disbursements in CMM, map the BAI codes
to a miscellaneous cash flow type, and ensure this miscellaneous cash flow type is not
referenced in any report mappings.

For more information, see the CMM Interfaces Guide.

A.2 Displaying floats
In the US-Mapping report mapping relationship, there is a report mapping category for floats (with a
type of Pseudo Flow):

278

The Floats report mapping category contains three report mapping groups:
Instrument type mapping
Group
Instrument type

Payment/receipt

Cash/deal

Intercompany

Float Balance
Current Day

0 Day Float

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

Float Balance +1 Day

1 Day Float

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

Float Balance +2 Day

2 Day Float

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

The Float Balance Current Day group’s usage policy is set to Display and Include in Balances,
while the Float Balance +1 Day and Float Balance +2 Day groups’ usage policies are set to
Display but Don’t Include in Balances. Therefore, all three floats display in reports, but only
the current-day float impacts balances.
By default, all three floats display in the columns of their respective value dates. However, you can
create bank transaction rules to modify the value dates of bank transactions with cash flow types of
1 Day Float and 2 Day Float so that one- and two-day floats display in the columns of the dates they
impact (rather than the columns of their original value dates):

For more information on creating bank transaction rules, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

Note: If you choose to do this, you can change the Float Balance +1 Day and Float Balance
+2 Day groups’ usage policies to Display and Include in Balances.

WebSuite User Guide

279

A.3 Displaying controlled disbursements
In the US-Mapping report mapping relationship, there is a report mapping category for controlled
disbursements (with a type of Inflow/Outflow):

The Controlled Disbursements report mapping category contains three report mapping groups:
Instrument type mapping
Group
Instrument type

Payment/rece
ipt

Cash/deal

Intercompany

Controlled Disbursements
-1

Controlled
Disbursement 1

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

Controlled Disbursements
-2

Controlled
Disbursement 2

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

Controlled Disbursements
-Final

Controlled
Disbursement Final

Both

Cash and
Forecast

Both

All three groups’ usage policies are set to Display but only include Latest Version in
Balances. Therefore, while up to three versions of a controlled disbursement can display in a report,
only the most current version of the controlled disbursement impacts balances. For example, if the
first and second versions of the controlled disbursement are available but not the final one, the first
and second versions display in a report using the US-Mapping report mapping relationship but only
the second version impacts balances.
You or your system administrator can define the order in which report mapping groups take
precedence in a report mapping category by editing the report_group_version_control.xml file.
For more information, see the WebSuite System Admin Guide.

280

Appendix B

Settlement rule types

Three types of settlement are available in CMM:

•

Net

•

Gross

•

Transactional.

Individual countries’ regulations determine the number of fund transfers you need to produce for
each bank account in a settlement and, thus, whether you should use net, gross, or transactional
settlement for a particular bank account.
If your organization uses multiple settlement levels, it can settle gross to gross or gross to net.
Technically, CMM can also facilitate net to gross settlement, but this may not be legal in some
countries.

B.1 Net settlement
In net settlement, one fund transfer is created for each participating bank account.
The following table presents an example bank account using net settlement:
Description

Amount

Opening Balance

0.00

Receipt 1

1,000,000.00

Payment 1

(30,000.00)

Payment 2

(6,000.00)

Receipt 2

1,500.00

Total Before Settlement

965,500.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Net)

(965,500.00)

Closing Balance

0.00

WebSuite User Guide

281

B.2 Gross settlement
In gross settlement, two fund transfers are created for each participating bank account:

•

One for the net of payments

•

One for the net of receipts.

The following table presents an example bank account using gross settlement:
Description

Amount

Opening Balance

0.00

Receipt 1

1,000,000.00

Payment 1

(30,000.00)

Payment 2

(6,000.00)

Receipt 2

1,500.00

Total Before Settlement

965,500.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Payments)

36,000.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Receipts)

(1,001,500.00)

Closing Balance

0.00

B.3 Transactional settlement
In transactional settlement, one fund transfer is created for each transaction in a bank account.
The following table presents the example bank account using transactional settlement:
Description

Amount

Opening Balance

0.00

Receipt 1

1,000,000.00

Payment 1

(30,000.00)

Payment 2

(6,000.00)

Receipt 2

1,500.00

282

Total Before Settlement

965,500.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Receipt 1)

(1,000,000.00)

Settlement Fund Transfer (Payment 1)

30,000.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Payment 2)

6,000.00

Settlement Fund Transfer (Receipt 2)

(1,500.00)

Closing Balance

0.00

WebSuite User Guide

283

284

Appendix C

Settlement rule methods

You can apply one of three settlement rule types to a bank account to ensure that the position the
bank account’s entity holds with an in-house bank is properly managed:

•

Intercompany

•

Pool-transfer

•

External-transfer.

C.1 Intercompany settlement
In an intercompany settlement rule, internal bank accounts are settled to internal bank accounts.
This process does not generate corresponding external movement.
With net settlement, an intercompany settlement rule creates a payment and corresponding receipt
from one internal bank account (internal bank account A) to another (internal bank account B).
A positive balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Payment

Internal A

Internal B

Receipt

Internal B

Internal A

A negative balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Payment

Internal B

Internal A

Receipt

Internal A

Internal B

Gross and transactional settlements generate different numbers of transactions than net
settlement:

•

With gross settlement, an intercompany settlement rule generates two transactions for each
bank account: one for the net of payments and the other for the net of receipts.

•

With transactional settlement, an intercompany settlement rule generates one settlement
transaction for each existing transaction in the bank account.

The following is an example intercompany settlement:

WebSuite User Guide

285

In this example:

•

Acme Germany initiated three external payments, which resulted in an internal balance of
EUR (900,000).

•

This balance is settled as an intercompany transaction between Acme Germany and Acme
Europe:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Amount

Payment

Acme Europe internal

Acme Germany internal

EUR 900,000

Receipt

Acme Germany internal

Acme Europe internal

EUR 900,000

C.2 Pool-transfer settlement
In a pool-transfer settlement rule, internal bank accounts are settled to internal bank accounts and
there are corresponding offsets between external bank accounts and pool bank accounts as part of a
pooling structure.
With net settlement, a pool-transfer settlement rule creates a payment and corresponding receipt
from one internal bank account (internal bank account A) to the in-house bank processing bank
account. This internal movement is offset by an external one between an external bank account
(external bank account A) and the in-house bank pool bank account.
A positive balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Payment

Internal A

IHB Processing

Payment

IHB Pool

External A

286

Receipt

External A

IHB Pool

Note: An offsetting receipt to the in-house bank’s processing bank account is not required

because the position the client of the in-house bank (in other words, A) holds with the
in-house bank is represented by the change in its internal balance.

A negative balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Receipt

Internal A

IHB Processing

Payment

Internal A

IHB Processing

Receipt

IHB Processing

Internal A

An offsetting payment out of the in-house bank’s internal bank account is not required because the
position the client of the in-house bank (in other words, A) holds with the in-house bank is
represented by the change in its internal balance.
Gross and transactional settlements generate different numbers of transactions than net
settlement:

•

With gross settlement, a pool-transfer settlement rule generates two transactions for each bank
account: one for the net of payments and the other for the net of receipts.

•

With transactional settlement, a pool-transfer settlement rule generates one settlement
transaction for each existing transaction in the bank account.

The following is an example pool-transfer settlement:

WebSuite User Guide

287

In this example:

•

Acme Germany initiated three external payments, which resulted in an internal balance of
EUR (900,000).

•

This balance is settled as an intercompany transaction between Acme Germany and the in-house
bank:

•

288

Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Amount

Receipt

Acme Germany internal

In-house bank processing

EUR 900,000

An external offset is created:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Amount

Payment

Acme Germany external

Pool

EUR 900,000

Receipt

Pool

Acme Germany external

EUR 900,000

C.3 External-transfer settlement
In an external-transfer settlement rule, internal bank accounts are settled to internal bank accounts
and there are corresponding offsets between external bank accounts. The external bank accounts
that are used in this type are not included in a pooling structure.

Note: Use external-transfer settlement with external mirrored bank accounts that are used to

process receipts on behalf of. This results in the mirroring of the external flows onto
specified internal bank accounts resulting in internal flows that have not actually occurred.
To settle internal bank accounts using external mirrored bank accounts, you must
manually create the required external flows and ensure that these flows are mirrored onto
the correct internal bank accounts.

With net settlement, an external-transfer settlement rule creates a payment and corresponding
receipt from one internal bank account (internal bank account A) to another (external bank account
B). This internal movement is offset by an external one between one external bank account
(external bank account A) and another (external bank account B).
A positive balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Payment

Internal A

Internal B

Receipt

Internal B

Internal A

Payment

External B

External A

Receipt

External A

External B

A negative balance results in the following transactions:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Payment

Internal B

Internal A

Receipt

Internal A

Internal B

Payment

External A

External B

Receipt

External B

External A

Gross and transactional settlements generate different numbers of transactions than net
settlement:

•

With gross settlement, an external-transfer settlement rule generates two transactions for each
bank account: one for the net of payments and the other for the net of receipts.

•

With transactional settlement, an external-transfer settlement rule generates one settlement
transaction for each existing transaction in the bank account.

The following is an example external-transfer settlement:

WebSuite User Guide

289

In this example:

•

Acme Germany initiated three external payments, which resulted in an internal balance of
EUR (900,000).

•

This balance is settled as an intercompany transaction between Acme Germany and Acme
Europe:

•

290

Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Amount

Payment

Acme Europe internal

Acme Germany internal

EUR 900,000

Receipt

Acme Germany internal

Acme Europe internal

EUR 900,000

An external offset is created:
Type

Entity bank account

Counterparty bank account

Amount

Payment

Acme Germany external

Acme Europe internal

EUR 900,000

Receipt

Acme Europe internal

Acme Germany external

EUR 900,000

Appendix D

Key interest, fee, and tax
calculation method components

The following are three key components of interest, fee, and tax calculation methods.

D.1 Interest calculation methods
The following table presents the interest calculation methods supported by CMM:
Name

Definition

No Compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is only calculated on the principal.
Note: This interest calculation method is only available for interest, fee, and tax
calculation methods in which interest is realized externally.

Daily compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous day’s interest.

Weekly
compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous week’s interest.

Bi-weekly
compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous two weeks’ interest.

Monthly
compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous month’s interest.

Quarterly
compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous quarter’s interest.

Semi-annual
compounding

Interest calculation method in which interest is calculated on the principal and the
previous half year’s interest.

Modified daily
compounding

Interest calculation method similar to daily compounding but using the following
formula:

Where:
•

InterestRate is the daily interest rate derived from the user’s selection in the in the
Day Basis list.

•

Term is derived from the user’s selection in the Day Basis list.

This interest calculation method was developed for the Brazilian market and is intended
to work with the Actual W/252 day basis.

WebSuite User Guide

291

D.2 Payment periods
The following table presents the payment periods supported by CMM:

Name

Definition

Daily

Payment period in which interest is paid or
charged on a daily basis.

Weekly

Payment period in which interest is paid on
a weekly basis.

Bi-weekly

Payment period in which interest is paid on
a bi-weekly basis (every two weeks).

Monthly

Payment period in which interest is paid on
a monthly basis.

Quarterly

Payment period in which interest is paid on
a quarterly basis (every three months).

Semi-annually

Payment period in which interest is paid on
a semi-annual basis (every six months).

Annually

Payment period in which interest is paid on
an annual basis.

Accounting period

Payment period in which interest is paid
every accounting period.

D.3 Day bases
The following table presents the day bases supported by CMM:
Name

Numerator

Denominator

30/360

30 days per month

360 days per year

Exceptions:

292

•

If the last date of the period is the 31st of the
month and the first date is not the 30th or 31st,
the month including the last date is considered to
have 31 days.

•

If the last day of the period is the last day of
February, February is not lengthened to 30 days.

30E/360

30 days per month

360 days per year

Exceptions:
•

If the first date or the last date of an accrual
period is on the 31st of a month, the date is set to
the 30th.

•

If the last date of the period is the last day of
February, February is not lengthened to 30 days.

Actual/36
0

Actual number of days in the period

360 days per year

Actual/36
5

Actual number of days in the period

365 days per year (including leap
years)

Actual/Ac
tual

Actual number of days in the period

365 days per year for non-leap years
and 366 days per year for leap years
(In other words, the denominator is
366 if the date range include February
29; otherwise, it is 365.)

Actual
W/252

Actual number of working days in the period.

252 days per year

(This day basis takes the country’s bank holiday
calendar into account so that interest is not calculated
on weekends or holidays.)

WebSuite User Guide

293

294

Appendix E

WebSuite menu options

Trading
Configuration
Deal Page Setup
Entities
Currencies
Lists
List Groups
Clients
Lists
List Groups
Instruments
Lists
List Groups
Portfolios
Lists
Deal Mappings
Report Mappings
Treasury Mappings
Automatic Pricing
Price Groups
All
Auto Accept
FX Spot
FX Forward
FX Swap
Deposit/Loan
Price Rules
Capture
Foreign Exchange
Spot
Spot (Batch Entry)
Forward
Swap
Option
IR Instruments
Short Deposit/Loan
Fixed Deposit/Loan
Floating Deposit/Loan
Bond
Discount
IR Swap
Cross Currency IR Swap
Equity
Cash
BA Balance
Payment
Transfer
Commercial Lending
Loan Drawdown Entry
Loan Drawdown Search
Loan Monitor
Basic
Advanced
Enhanced
Expert
Request
Foreign Exchange
Spot
Forward
Swap
Option
IR Instruments
Short Deposit/Loan
Pending Transactions
Priced Transactions
Processing
Deal Confirmation
Reopened Transactions
Review Transactions
Simple Search
Advanced Search

WebSuite User Guide

295

E WebSuite menu options

Treasury Monitor
Instrument Based
EQ Summary
EQ Detail
TP-LIQ
Balance by date and account
Liquidity in base currency
Liquidity in foreign currencies
Position and Risk
Instrument Category
Instrument Group
Instrument
Maturity Bucket
Liquidity
Miscellaneous
Crossed totals
Liquidities
Forecasting
Configuration
Forecast Configuration Maintenance
Forecast Entry
Forecast Mirroring
Forecast Horizons
Forecast Allocation Models
Forecast Import Formats
Review Forecast Configuration Documents
Capture
Import Forecasts
Enter (Cut & Paste) Forecasts
Enter Short-Term Forecasts
Enter Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
Processing
Approve Short-Term Forecasts
Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
2nd Approve Short-Term Forecasts
2nd Approve Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
Release Short-Term Forecasts
Release Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
Re-Open Short-Term Forecasts
Re-Open Medium- to Long-Term Forecasts
Cancel Forecasts
Payment Factory
Configuration
Payment Factory Configuration Maintenance
Transaction Routing Rules
Transaction Processing Rules
Repetitive Codes
Pre-Advice Reporting Limits
Single Transaction Template Maintenance
Capture
Import Transaction Files
Import AR Files
Enter Single Transaction
Enter Repetitive Transactions
Enter Intercompany Payment
Enter Deposits
Undo Transaction File Imports
Undo AR File Imports
Processing
Edit Transactions
Edit Intercompany Payment
Authorize Transactions
Release Payments
Release Receipts
Reject Transactions
Import Bank Message Files
Review Payment Authorization
Review Unreleased Payments
Review Release Documents
Review Export Status
Undo Transaction Authorizations
Undo Transaction Releases
Undo Transaction Rejection
Message Admin
Search Cash Management Fin Messages
Search Treasury Fin Messages
Banking
Configuration
Bank Transaction Import Rules
Bank Transaction Templates
Bank Statement Number Rules
Intraday Bank Statement Processing Rules
Reconciliation Configuration Maintenance
Reconciliation Tolerances
Cash Allocation Rules

296

E WebSuite menu options

Target Balance Rules
Verify Internal Bank Balances
Capture
Import Bank Transaction Files
Enter Bank Statement
Enter Bank Transactions
Undo Bank Transaction File Imports
Bank Statement
Close Bank Statements
Export Bank Statements
Generate Internal Bank Transactions
Close Internal Bank Transactions
Bank Balance
Update Bank Balances
Calculate Bank Balances
Recalculate IHB Account Balances
Export Bank Account Balance
Cash Balance
Update Cash Balances
Calculate Cash Balances
Reconciliation
Cash Reconciliation
Manual Reconciliation
Bank Reconciliation
Enter Cash Allocations
Interest
Interest Calculation
Undo Interest Calculation
Target Balancing
Cash Monitor
Settlement
Lock/Unlock Settlement Accounts
Settle Bank Accounts
Undo Settlement
Netting
Netting Application
Netting Periods
Net Position By Entity
Net Position By Currency
Central Banking
Regulatory Transaction Codes
Accounting
Configuration
Posting Requirement Definition
Processing
Generate Daily Accounting Events
Reporting
Configuration
Report Mapping
Time Bucket Sets
Trading
FX Instruments
FX Daily Deals
FX Outstanding Position
EQ Instruments
Equity
EQ Transactions
MM Instruments
MM Daily Deals
MM Inventory
Other Reports
Key Figure
Balance
Cashflows
Fixing Rate
Forecasting
Forecast Reports
Payment Factory
Cash Transaction Report
Cash Position
Bank/Account Analysis
Remittance Detail Report
Review Transaction Error Messages
Banking
Bank Statement
Bank Transaction Report
Bank Download Report
Review Returned Checks
Bank Balance Analysis
International Bank Account Balances
Daily Reconciliation Report
Suspense Reconciliation Report
Interest Report
Interest Allocation
Credit Line Report

WebSuite User Guide

297

E WebSuite menu options

Bank Account Summary Report
Settlement Report
Central Bank Regulatory Report
Regulatory Reporting
Accounting
Chart of Accounts
Chart of Accounts Verification
Accounting Entry State
Accounting Journal
Trial Balance Summary
Accounting Events Report
Daily Activity Timetable
Dashboard
Admin
Trading
Synchronization Console
Static data
Portfolio
User Groups
Users
Application Server
Information
Environment
Log
Trader-Client Mappings
Trading Hours
Mode Mappings
User Information
Static Data
Entities
Edit Entity
Edit In-House Bank
Entity Bank Accounts
Entity Relationships
Entity ID Mapping for AP & AR
Bank Account Group Mapping
Settlement Groups
People
Signatories
Counterparties
Edit Counterparty
Counterparty Bank Accounts
Counterparty Types
Counterparty Contacts
Supporting Data
Bank Account Relationships
Bank Account Types
Bank Holidays
Business Segments
Countries
Currencies
Employee Roles
Industry Codes
Parameter Editor
Party Relationships
Party Roles
Payment Methods
Regions
States
Instruments
Instrument Categories
Instrument Groups
Instrument Types
Central Banking
Regulatory Reporting Codes
Exposure Management
Limits
Bank Interfacing
Interfaces Configuration Maintenance
Communication Protocols
Communication Protocol Parameters
Signers
Signer Parameters
Command Line Processors
Interchanges
Branch Qualifiers
SWIFT Payment Templates
Transaction Subtype Mapping
Review
Review Entities
Review Counterparties
Review Entity Bank Accounts
Market Data
Interest
Import Interest Rates

298

E WebSuite menu options

Interest Rates
Tiered Interest Rates
Interest Rate Categories
Interest Rate Types
Interest Calculation Methods
Yield Curves
Yield Curve Interest Rates
Foreign Exchange
FX Rates
FX Rate Scenarios
FX Rate Scenario Mapping
Review
Review Interest Rates
Review FX Rates
Review Interest Calculation Methods
Security
Management
Security Configuration Maintenance
Users
User Information
Authorization
Authorization Request Types
Review Authorization Requests
Pending Authorizations
Audit
Audit Object Attributes
Audit Events
Audit Reporting
Import Audit Files
Utilities

WebSuite User Guide

299

E WebSuite menu options

300

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Signing Date                    : 2011:07:22 11:12:10+02:00
Signing Authority               : ARE_Acrobat Collaboration V7.0 P9 0000109
Annotation Usage Rights         : Create, Delete, Modify, Copy, Import, Export
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2011:07:22 10:57:04Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date                     : 2011:07:22 11:12:10+02:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:07:22 11:12:10+02:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : .
Title                           : WebSuite User Guide
Document ID                     : uuid:f9d9d02f-ce43-4f80-9549-1d9ca7b8142d
Instance ID                     : uuid:b61f474d-22f3-49da-99c9-56d740a6f02d
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 300

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

WebSuite User Guide Web Suite

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation